1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
55 \use_default_options false
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
62 \language_package default
67 \font_typewriter default
69 \font_default_family default
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \default_output_format default
78 \bibtex_command default
79 \index_command default
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
99 \use_package amsmath 1
100 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package cancel 0
103 \use_package mathdots 1
104 \use_package mathtools 0
105 \use_package mhchem 1
106 \use_package stackrel 0
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
108 \use_package undertilde 0
110 \cite_engine_type numerical
114 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation indent
136 \paragraph_indentation default
137 \quotes_language english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes true
142 \output_changes false
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
148 \author 2090807402 "usti"
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
168 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Note Note
190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
191 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
192 \begin_inset Newline newline
197 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
205 \begin_layout Standard
206 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
207 LatexCommand tableofcontents
214 \begin_layout Chapter
218 \begin_layout Section
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 LyX is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
282 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
297 \begin_layout Standard
298 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
300 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
301 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
307 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
308 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
310 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
311 only a vertical scrollbar.
312 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
313 The first case is large images.
314 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
315 image and use the option
321 LaTeX and LyX options
324 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
326 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
327 this doesn't work for equations yet.
330 \begin_layout Standard
331 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
339 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
346 \begin_layout Section
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
352 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
353 Just select the manual you want to read from the
360 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
364 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
378 \begin_inset Index idx
381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
387 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
388 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
389 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
391 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
392 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
397 \begin_inset space \space{}
400 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
401 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
403 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
407 \begin_inset Index idx
410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
411 Reconfiguration of LyX
416 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
419 \begin_layout Section
421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
423 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
430 \begin_layout Standard
431 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
432 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
434 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
435 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
439 \begin_layout Standard
440 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
442 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
443 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
448 you can view from the menu
450 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
469 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
470 reconfigure LyX (menu
472 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
476 \begin_inset Note Note
479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
480 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
488 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
489 More about TeX Code is described in section
494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
496 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
500 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
507 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
517 \begin_inset Index idx
520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
521 Reconfiguration of LyX
526 See section 5.1 of the
530 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
533 \begin_layout Chapter
537 \begin_layout Section
538 Basic File Operations
539 \begin_inset Index idx
542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
551 \begin_layout Standard
556 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
557 in addition to some more advanced operations:
560 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
586 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
604 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "dialog-show print"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Standard
681 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
682 a few minor differences.
685 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
696 command lists the available templates.
697 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
698 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
699 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
707 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
714 \begin_layout Standard
715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
747 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
748 space is just that — a big, blank space.
756 \begin_layout Standard
777 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
782 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
784 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
802 will reload the document from disk.
803 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
804 and want to restore it to the last save.
813 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
814 them as your changes.
817 \begin_layout Section
818 Basic Editing Features
819 \begin_inset Index idx
822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
831 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
838 \begin_layout Standard
839 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
840 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
841 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
842 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
844 We will start with cut and paste.
847 \begin_layout Standard
848 As you might expect, the
852 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
853 various other editing features.
854 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
858 \begin_layout Itemize
872 \begin_layout Itemize
886 \begin_layout Itemize
900 \begin_layout Itemize
910 \begin_layout Itemize
920 \begin_layout Itemize
936 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
942 \begin_layout Standard
943 The first three are self-explanatory.
945 \begin_inset Index idx
948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
954 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
963 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
966 \begin_layout Standard
969 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
974 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
989 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
991 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
1000 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
1001 will start a new paragraph.
1004 \begin_layout Standard
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1015 \begin_inset Index idx
1018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1026 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset space ~
1040 \begin_inset space ~
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1055 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1058 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset space ~
1072 button to skip the current word.
1076 \begin_inset space ~
1081 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1085 \begin_inset space ~
1090 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1092 If the toggle is set, searching for
1093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1104 will not match the word
1105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1119 Match whole words only
1121 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1150 LyX offers also an advanced
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1157 \begin_inset space ~
1162 feature that is described in sec.
1163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1169 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1176 \begin_layout Standard
1177 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1178 \begin_inset space \space{}
1182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1190 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1192 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1197 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1204 \begin_layout Standard
1205 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1208 arg "inset-select-all"
1214 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1217 selects the whole document.
1220 \begin_layout Section
1222 \begin_inset Index idx
1225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1232 \begin_inset Index idx
1235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1244 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1251 \begin_layout Standard
1252 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1253 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1256 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1259 or the toolbar button
1265 to undo some mistake.
1266 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1268 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1271 or the toolbar button
1278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1285 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1289 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1292 \begin_layout Standard
1293 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1302 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1303 This is a consequence of the 100
1304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1307 step undo limit mentioned above.
1310 \begin_layout Standard
1319 work on almost everything in LyX.
1320 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1324 \begin_layout Section
1326 \begin_inset Index idx
1329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1338 \begin_layout Standard
1339 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1342 \begin_layout Enumerate
1347 \begin_layout Itemize
1352 once anywhere in the edit window.
1353 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1357 \begin_layout Enumerate
1362 \begin_layout Itemize
1368 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1374 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1377 \begin_layout Itemize
1378 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1380 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1387 \begin_layout Enumerate
1388 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1394 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1398 \begin_layout Section
1400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1402 name "sec:Navigating"
1407 \begin_inset Index idx
1410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1419 \begin_layout Standard
1420 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1423 \begin_layout Itemize
1428 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1429 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1432 \begin_layout Itemize
1433 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1435 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1438 or by the toolbar button
1441 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1447 \begin_layout Itemize
1448 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1450 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1453 and use the same menu to return to them.
1454 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1457 \begin_layout Standard
1461 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1466 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1467 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1474 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1475 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1476 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1477 your last editing position.
1480 \begin_layout Standard
1485 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1488 \begin_layout Subsection
1490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1492 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1499 \begin_layout Standard
1500 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1501 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1502 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1510 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1514 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1521 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1526 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1532 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1533 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1534 dialog and to modify the citation.
1537 \begin_layout Standard
1538 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1540 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1541 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1549 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1552 \begin_layout Standard
1553 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1554 you further to control the display.
1559 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1560 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1566 option keeps it in the current view state.
1567 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1568 \begin_inset space ~
1571 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1572 \begin_inset space ~
1575 3, the subsections of sections
1576 \begin_inset space ~
1579 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1584 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1585 \begin_inset space ~
1589 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1599 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1602 \begin_layout Standard
1604 \begin_inset space \space{}
1608 \begin_inset Graphics
1609 filename ../images/reload.png
1614 \begin_inset space ~
1617 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1618 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1621 \begin_inset space \space{}
1625 \begin_inset Graphics
1626 filename ../images/down.png
1628 groupId toolbarbuttons
1633 \begin_inset space ~
1637 \begin_inset space \space{}
1641 \begin_inset Graphics
1642 filename ../images/up.png
1644 groupId toolbarbuttons
1649 \begin_inset space ~
1652 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1653 So, for example, you can move section
1654 \begin_inset space ~
1658 \begin_inset space ~
1661 2.4 or after section
1662 \begin_inset space ~
1666 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1668 \begin_inset Graphics
1669 filename ../images/promote.png
1671 groupId toolbarbuttons
1676 \begin_inset Graphics
1677 filename ../images/demote.png
1679 groupId toolbarbuttons
1683 (or the corresponding key bindings
1691 ) you can change the level of sections.
1692 So you can for example make section
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1697 \begin_inset space ~
1701 \begin_inset space ~
1707 \begin_layout Section
1708 Input/Word Completion
1709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1711 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1716 \begin_inset Index idx
1719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1726 \begin_inset Index idx
1729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1760 \begin_layout Standard
1761 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1763 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1764 is used to propose completions.
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1770 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1775 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset space ~
1791 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1795 \begin_inset space ~
1800 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1801 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1811 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1812 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1817 are completions available.
1822 key to accept a proposed completion.
1823 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1824 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1825 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1832 \begin_layout Standard
1833 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1834 ing options for text.
1835 The special math option
1839 enables characters to be composed.
1840 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1841 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1844 , you can then input the characters
1845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1856 to a formula to get it.
1857 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1858 of the math toolbar.
1859 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1863 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1864 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1873 \begin_layout Section
1875 \begin_inset Index idx
1878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1885 \begin_inset Index idx
1888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1917 \begin_inset Index idx
1920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
1965 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
1967 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1971 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1978 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
1985 \begin_layout Standard
1989 \begin_inset space ~
1997 \begin_inset space ~
2018 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2022 \begin_layout Labeling
2023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2027 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2028 LatexCommand nomenclature
2030 description "Tabulator key"
2036 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2037 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2044 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2051 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2055 , especially section
2056 \begin_inset space ~
2060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2062 reference "sub:Lists"
2068 If you are still confused, look in the
2073 \begin_inset Newline newline
2080 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2081 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2085 \begin_layout Labeling
2086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2090 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2091 LatexCommand nomenclature
2093 description "Escape key"
2100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2107 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2108 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2111 \begin_layout Labeling
2112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2118 \begin_inset space ~
2122 \begin_inset space ~
2129 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2130 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2134 \begin_layout Standard
2135 There are three modifier keys:
2138 \begin_layout Labeling
2139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2157 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2158 LatexCommand nomenclature
2160 description "Control key"
2164 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2165 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2169 \begin_layout Itemize
2178 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2181 \begin_layout Itemize
2190 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2193 \begin_layout Itemize
2202 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2206 \begin_layout Labeling
2207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2225 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2226 LatexCommand nomenclature
2228 description "Shift key"
2232 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2233 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2236 \begin_layout Labeling
2237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2255 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2256 LatexCommand nomenclature
2258 description "Alt or Meta key"
2262 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2263 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2264 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2270 \begin_inset Newline newline
2273 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2275 menu accelerator keys
2278 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2279 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2283 \begin_layout Standard
2284 For example, the sequence
2285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2291 \begin_inset space ~
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2328 \begin_inset space ~
2334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2344 \begin_layout Standard
2349 manual lists all other things bound to the
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2359 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2360 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2361 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2362 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2363 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2364 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2366 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2382 followed by a capital
2389 \begin_layout Chapter
2391 \begin_inset Index idx
2394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2403 \begin_layout Section
2405 \begin_inset Index idx
2408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2417 \begin_layout Subsection
2421 \begin_layout Standard
2422 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2423 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2424 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2425 numbering schemes, and so on.
2426 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2427 and format the title of your document differently.
2430 \begin_layout Standard
2435 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2436 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2437 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2438 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2439 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2442 \begin_layout Subsection
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2456 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2463 \begin_layout Standard
2464 You can select a class using the
2466 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2467 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2471 \begin_inset Index idx
2474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2481 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2489 \begin_layout Standard
2490 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2494 \begin_layout Description
2495 Article for basic articles
2498 \begin_layout Description
2499 Report for basic reports
2502 \begin_layout Description
2503 Book for writing a book
2506 \begin_layout Description
2507 Letter for US-style letters
2510 \begin_layout Standard
2511 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2512 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2513 will include many of these.
2514 Here are some of the classes.
2515 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2517 Special Document Classes
2526 \begin_layout Description
2527 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2530 \begin_layout Description
2531 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2535 \begin_layout Description
2536 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2540 \begin_layout Description
2541 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2542 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2543 There are three article layouts available.
2544 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2545 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2546 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2547 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2552 sequential numbering
2553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2557 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2558 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2559 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2562 \begin_layout Description
2563 Beamer Layout for presentations
2566 \begin_layout Description
2567 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2568 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2572 \begin_layout Description
2573 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2576 \begin_layout Description
2578 \begin_inset space ~
2581 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2584 \begin_layout Description
2585 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2588 \begin_layout Description
2589 Foils Used to make transparencies
2592 \begin_layout Description
2593 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2594 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2598 \begin_layout Description
2599 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2600 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2603 \begin_layout Description
2604 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2607 \begin_layout Description
2608 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2611 \begin_layout Description
2612 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2613 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2614 (Is used by this document.)
2617 \begin_layout Description
2618 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2621 \begin_layout Description
2622 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2625 \begin_layout Description
2630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2638 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2640 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2643 \begin_layout Description
2644 Slides Used to make transparencies
2647 \begin_layout Description
2649 \begin_inset space ~
2652 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2653 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2656 \begin_layout Description
2657 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2660 \begin_layout Standard
2661 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2663 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2669 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2670 of the document classes.
2673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2677 \begin_layout Standard
2678 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2680 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2681 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2683 \begin_inset Index idx
2686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2703 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2704 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2706 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2711 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2712 and some of them, like
2716 , are highly specialized.
2717 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2718 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2720 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2721 by some document class.
2722 There are just too many of them.
2723 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2726 \begin_layout Standard
2727 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2735 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2736 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2737 document class for a new file.
2738 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2743 Installing new LaTeX files
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2751 manual for information on how to install them.
2752 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2758 \begin_layout Standard
2759 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2760 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2762 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2763 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2764 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2766 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2769 \begin_inset space ~
2776 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2788 \begin_inset Index idx
2791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2800 \begin_layout Standard
2801 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2802 chosen document class.
2803 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2804 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2825 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2829 \begin_layout Standard
2830 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2831 always installed by default.
2832 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2833 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2834 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2835 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2836 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2837 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2838 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2841 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2849 Reconfiguration of LyX
2855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2858 Installing new LaTeX files
2859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2866 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2878 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2879 LyX will advise you about these things.
2887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2891 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2896 \begin_inset Index idx
2899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2900 Document ! Local Layout
2908 \begin_layout Standard
2909 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2910 used in a variety of different documents.
2911 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2912 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2913 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2914 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2915 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2916 What you want is LyX's
2917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2933 manual for information on how to use it.
2936 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2941 Each class has a default set of options.
2942 Here's a quick table describing them:
2945 \begin_layout Standard
2946 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 \begin_inset Tabular
2955 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
2956 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2961 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 \begin_layout Standard
3416 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3422 \begin_layout Standard
3423 You're probably also wondering what
3424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3428 \begin_inset space ~
3432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3436 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3437 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3442 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3447 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3457 headings, there are also
3465 headings, and so on.
3466 We will describe these headings fully in section
3467 \begin_inset space ~
3471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3473 reference "sub:Headings"
3480 \begin_layout Subsection
3482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3484 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3489 \begin_inset Index idx
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 \begin_inset Index idx
3504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 \begin_layout Standard
3514 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3516 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3523 \begin_inset space ~
3531 \begin_inset space ~
3536 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3538 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3539 to use for your document.
3540 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3544 \begin_layout Standard
3548 \begin_inset space ~
3555 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3561 \begin_inset space ~
3566 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3567 You can choose between the following five options:
3570 \begin_layout Labeling
3571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3576 Use default page style of current class.
3579 \begin_layout Labeling
3580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3585 No page numbers or headings.
3588 \begin_layout Labeling
3589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3597 \begin_layout Labeling
3598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3603 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3604 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3605 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3608 \begin_layout Labeling
3609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3614 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3615 have the LaTeX-package
3620 \begin_inset Index idx
3623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3630 How they are defined is explained in section
3631 \begin_inset space ~
3635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3637 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3644 \begin_layout Standard
3645 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3646 \begin_inset space ~
3650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3652 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3659 \begin_layout Subsection
3660 Paper Size and Orientation
3661 \begin_inset Index idx
3664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3665 Document ! Paper size
3671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3673 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3680 \begin_layout Standard
3681 You can find the following options in the menu
3684 \begin_inset space ~
3691 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3697 \begin_inset Index idx
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3709 \begin_layout Labeling
3710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3714 \begin_inset space ~
3719 What size paper to print on.
3724 \begin_layout Itemize
3730 \begin_layout Itemize
3736 \begin_layout Itemize
3742 \begin_layout Itemize
3748 \begin_layout Itemize
3751 US letter, US legal, US executive
3754 \begin_layout Itemize
3760 \begin_layout Itemize
3767 \begin_layout Labeling
3768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3773 To choose whether to output as
3784 \begin_layout Labeling
3785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3794 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3795 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3798 \begin_layout Subsection
3800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3807 \begin_inset Index idx
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3817 \begin_inset Index idx
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 \begin_layout Standard
3830 Paper margins are set in the menu
3832 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3836 \begin_inset Index idx
3839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3850 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3851 the paper format and the font size into account.
3854 \begin_layout Subsection
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3864 That includes the paragraph environments.
3865 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3866 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3867 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3868 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3877 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3879 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3880 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3881 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3884 \begin_layout Section
3885 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3886 \begin_inset Index idx
3889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3890 Paragraph ! Indentation
3898 \begin_layout Subsection
3900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3902 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3909 \begin_layout Standard
3910 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3911 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3914 \begin_layout Standard
3915 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3916 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3917 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3918 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3922 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3928 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3929 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3930 language than English.
3931 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
3935 \begin_layout Standard
3936 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3937 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
3939 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3940 LyX takes care of that.
3941 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3943 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3944 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3945 of a page, and so on.
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
3955 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
3956 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
3960 these pre-coded spacings.
3961 We will explain more later.
3964 \begin_layout Subsection
3965 Paragraph Separation
3966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3968 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3973 \begin_inset Index idx
3976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3977 Paragraph ! Separation
3985 \begin_layout Standard
3993 \begin_inset space ~
4001 \begin_inset space ~
4008 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset Index idx
4015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4021 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4024 \begin_layout Subsection
4028 \begin_layout Standard
4029 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4032 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4034 \begin_inset space ~
4039 dialog and toggle the
4042 \begin_inset space ~
4047 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4050 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4054 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4055 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4059 \begin_layout Standard
4060 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4061 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4064 \begin_layout Subsection
4066 \begin_inset Index idx
4069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4078 \begin_layout Standard
4081 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4085 \begin_inset Index idx
4088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4097 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4101 \begin_inset space ~
4110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4111 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4125 installed to use this feature.
4130 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4132 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset space ~
4139 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4140 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4143 \begin_layout Section
4144 Paragraph Environments
4145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4147 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4152 \begin_inset Index idx
4155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4156 Paragraph ! Environments
4162 \begin_inset Index idx
4165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4166 Paragraph environments|(
4174 \begin_layout Subsection
4178 \begin_layout Standard
4179 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4182 \begin_layout Standard
4201 \begin_inset Newline newline
4204 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4205 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4206 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4215 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4218 \begin_layout Standard
4219 A paragraph environment is simply a
4220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4227 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4228 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4229 scheme, labels, and so on.
4230 Additionally, you can
4231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4238 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4239 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4240 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4241 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4243 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4245 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4248 \begin_layout Standard
4249 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4250 \begin_inset Graphics
4251 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4257 at the left end of the toolbar.
4258 LyX will change the environment of the
4262 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4263 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4264 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4277 create a new paragraph using the
4281 paragraph environment.
4283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4290 because if you are in one of these environments:
4293 \begin_layout Itemize
4299 \begin_layout Itemize
4305 \begin_layout Itemize
4311 \begin_layout Itemize
4317 \begin_layout Itemize
4323 \begin_layout Itemize
4329 \begin_layout Itemize
4335 \begin_layout Standard
4336 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4340 , rather than resetting it to
4345 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4346 \begin_inset space ~
4350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4352 reference "sec:Nesting"
4359 \begin_layout Subsection
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 The default paragraph environment is
4369 It creates a plain paragraph.
4370 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4371 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4372 this manual) are in the
4379 \begin_layout Standard
4380 You can nest a paragraph using the
4384 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4392 \begin_layout Subsection
4394 \begin_inset Index idx
4397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4406 \begin_layout Standard
4407 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4416 for thanks or contact information.
4417 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4418 page along with today's date.
4419 For other types of documents, the title
4420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4427 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4431 \begin_layout Standard
4432 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4446 Here's how you use them:
4449 \begin_layout Itemize
4450 Put the title of your document in the
4457 \begin_layout Itemize
4458 Put the author name in the
4465 \begin_layout Itemize
4466 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4467 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4473 Note that using this environment is optional.
4474 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4475 If you don't want a date, use the option
4477 Suppress default date on front page
4481 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4482 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4484 \begin_inset space ~
4492 \begin_layout Standard
4493 You can use footnotes to insert
4494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4501 or contact information.
4504 \begin_layout Subsection
4506 \begin_inset Index idx
4509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4527 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4532 \begin_inset Index idx
4535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 Section headings ! Numbered
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4549 \begin_layout Enumerate
4555 \begin_layout Enumerate
4561 \begin_layout Enumerate
4567 \begin_layout Enumerate
4573 \begin_layout Enumerate
4579 \begin_layout Enumerate
4585 \begin_layout Enumerate
4591 \begin_layout Standard
4592 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4593 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4594 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4597 \begin_layout Standard
4598 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4599 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4600 You group the book into chapters.
4601 LyX does a similar grouping:
4604 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 is divided into either
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Itemize
4644 \begin_layout Itemize
4656 \begin_layout Itemize
4668 \begin_layout Itemize
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4681 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4689 Not all document types use the
4693 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4698 is the top-level heading.
4706 \begin_layout Standard
4711 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4712 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4714 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4728 \begin_inset Index idx
4731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4732 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4740 \begin_layout Standard
4741 The unnumbered section headings have a
4742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4749 at the end of their name.
4750 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4751 the table of contents, see section
4752 \begin_inset space ~
4756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4766 Changing the Numbering
4767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4769 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4776 \begin_layout Standard
4777 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4778 in the Table of Contents.
4779 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4781 Just as certain classes start with
4795 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4805 This is something you can change.
4808 \begin_layout Standard
4811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4815 \begin_inset Index idx
4818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4827 \begin_inset space ~
4831 \begin_inset space ~
4836 you will see two counters.
4841 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4843 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4848 Short Titles of Headings
4849 \begin_inset Index idx
4852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4853 Section headings ! Short titles
4859 \begin_inset Argument 1
4862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4871 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4878 \begin_layout Standard
4879 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4880 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4881 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4882 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4886 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4887 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4888 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4889 To specify a short title, use the menu
4891 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4893 \begin_inset space ~
4899 This will insert a box labeled
4900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4915 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
4916 This also works for captions inside floats.
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4927 \begin_layout Standard
4928 The following information applies to all section headings:
4931 \begin_layout Itemize
4932 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4939 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4943 \begin_layout Itemize
4944 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
4947 \begin_layout Subsection
4948 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
4951 \begin_layout Standard
4952 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
4966 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
4967 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
4968 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
4969 the text they contain.
4970 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
4978 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
4991 when you start a new paragraph.
4992 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
4996 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
4997 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
4998 have to change back to the
5002 environment yourself.
5005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5022 \begin_inset Index idx
5025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5034 \begin_layout Standard
5035 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5036 time for the differences.
5045 are identical except for one difference:
5049 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5058 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5062 Here's an example of the
5075 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5077 See – no indentation!
5081 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5082 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5083 the other paragraph.
5086 \begin_layout Standard
5087 Here's another example, this time in the
5094 \begin_layout Quotation
5100 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5101 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5102 the first line, then
5106 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5110 you were quoting other text.
5113 \begin_layout Quotation
5114 Here's a new paragraph.
5115 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5116 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5119 \begin_layout Standard
5120 As the examples show,
5124 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5125 They should put quotes in the
5130 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5134 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5143 \begin_inset Index idx
5146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5155 \begin_inset Index idx
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5174 \begin_layout Standard
5179 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5185 \begin_inset Newline newline
5188 Which I did not rehearse!
5192 It could be much worse.
5193 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5195 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5196 indented a bit more than the first.
5197 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5203 \begin_inset Newline newline
5206 And make things look fine
5207 \begin_inset Newline newline
5213 arg "newline-insert newline"
5219 \begin_layout Standard
5224 does not indent both margins.
5225 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5226 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5233 arg "newline-insert newline"
5239 \begin_layout Subsection
5241 \begin_inset Index idx
5244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5260 \begin_layout Standard
5261 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5271 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5280 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5281 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5282 describing some general features of all four of them.
5285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5289 \begin_layout Standard
5290 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5292 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5301 reset the environment to
5305 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5306 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5307 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5311 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5315 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5323 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5324 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5326 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5327 you read all of section
5328 \begin_inset space ~
5332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5334 reference "sec:Nesting"
5341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5347 \begin_inset Index idx
5350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5366 \begin_layout Standard
5367 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5371 paragraph environment.
5372 It has the following properties:
5375 \begin_layout Itemize
5376 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 The items can have any length.
5391 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5392 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5399 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 environment inside another
5408 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5422 \begin_inset space ~
5426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5428 reference "sec:Nesting"
5432 for a full explanation of nesting.
5436 \begin_layout Standard
5437 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5446 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5449 \begin_layout Standard
5450 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5451 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5454 \begin_layout Itemize
5455 The label for the first level
5459 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5463 \begin_layout Itemize
5464 The label for the second level is a dash.
5468 \begin_layout Itemize
5469 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5473 \begin_layout Itemize
5474 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5478 \begin_layout Itemize
5479 Back out to the third level.
5483 \begin_layout Itemize
5484 Back to the second level.
5488 \begin_layout Itemize
5489 Back to the outermost level.
5492 \begin_layout Standard
5493 These are the default labels for an
5498 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5500 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5503 dialog in the submenu
5508 \begin_inset Index idx
5511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5517 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5520 \begin_layout Standard
5521 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5522 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5524 \begin_inset space ~
5528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5530 reference "sec:Nesting"
5537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5543 \begin_inset Index idx
5546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5555 name "sec:Enumerate"
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5567 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5568 It has these properties:
5571 \begin_layout Enumerate
5572 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5576 \begin_layout Enumerate
5577 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5581 \begin_layout Enumerate
5582 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5585 \begin_layout Enumerate
5590 environment resets the counter to one.
5593 \begin_layout Enumerate
5606 \begin_layout Enumerate
5607 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5608 Items can have any length.
5611 \begin_layout Enumerate
5612 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5615 \begin_layout Enumerate
5616 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5619 \begin_layout Enumerate
5620 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5633 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5634 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5641 \begin_layout Enumerate
5642 The first level of an
5646 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5650 \begin_layout Enumerate
5651 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5655 \begin_layout Enumerate
5656 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5660 \begin_layout Enumerate
5661 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5664 \begin_layout Enumerate
5665 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5670 \begin_layout Enumerate
5671 Back to the third level
5675 \begin_layout Enumerate
5676 Back to the second level.
5680 \begin_layout Enumerate
5681 Back to the outermost level.
5684 \begin_layout Standard
5685 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5689 environment, see section
5690 \begin_inset space ~
5694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5696 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5701 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5704 \begin_layout Standard
5705 There is more to nesting
5709 environments than we've stated here.
5710 You should read section
5711 \begin_inset space ~
5715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5717 reference "sec:Nesting"
5721 to learn more about nesting.
5724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5730 \begin_inset Index idx
5733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5747 list has no fixed label.
5748 Instead, LyX uses the first
5749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5756 of the first line as the label.
5760 \begin_layout Description
5761 Example: This is an example of the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5782 it is meant that the first usage of the
5786 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5788 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5796 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5801 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5802 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5804 \begin_inset space ~
5810 \begin_inset space ~
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5816 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5820 for more information.) Here is an example:
5823 \begin_layout Description
5825 \begin_inset space ~
5828 Example: This one shows how to use a
5831 \begin_inset space ~
5843 \begin_layout Description
5844 Usage: You should use the
5848 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5849 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5851 It's not a good idea to use a
5855 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5856 You're better off using
5868 paragraphs into them.
5871 \begin_layout Description
5872 Nesting: You can nest
5876 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5880 \begin_layout Standard
5881 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5882 them from the first line.
5885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5887 \begin_inset Index idx
5890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5904 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5907 \begin_layout Standard
5916 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5918 Here are its properties:
5921 \begin_layout Labeling
5922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5924 \begin_inset space ~
5927 labels LyX uses the first
5928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5935 of each line as the item label.
5940 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
5941 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
5942 space as described above.
5945 \begin_layout Labeling
5946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5947 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
5948 the body of the item text.
5949 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
5950 label width plus a little extra space.
5954 \begin_layout Labeling
5955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5957 \begin_inset space ~
5960 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
5962 If the label width is larger, the label
5963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5970 into the first line.
5971 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
5972 margin of the rest of the item text.
5975 \begin_layout Labeling
5976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5978 \begin_inset space ~
5981 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
5986 environment has the same left margin.
5987 \begin_inset Newline newline
5990 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
5993 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5995 \begin_inset space ~
6000 dialog (toolbar button
6003 arg "layout-paragraph"
6010 \begin_inset space ~
6015 determines the default label width.
6016 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6025 multiple times instead.
6026 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6035 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6043 every time you alter a label in a
6048 \begin_inset Newline newline
6051 The predefined default width is the length of
6052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6060 \begin_inset space ~
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6071 list the same way as the
6075 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6081 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6085 \begin_layout Standard
6090 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6091 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6093 \begin_inset space ~
6097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6099 reference "sec:Nesting"
6103 to learn about nesting.
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6107 There is yet another feature of the
6111 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6113 You can use additional
6117 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6122 are documented in section
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6129 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6134 Here are some examples:
6137 \begin_layout Labeling
6138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6139 Left The default for
6146 \begin_layout Labeling
6147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6148 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6155 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6158 \begin_layout Labeling
6159 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6160 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6164 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6171 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6174 \begin_layout Subsection
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6178 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6183 \begin_inset Index idx
6186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6195 \begin_layout Standard
6196 The features described in this section require that the module
6198 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6200 is loaded in the document settings.
6201 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6206 \begin_inset Index idx
6209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6210 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6219 Custom Enumerate Lists
6220 \begin_inset Index idx
6223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6224 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6237 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6240 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6241 There you add the command
6244 \begin_layout Standard
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 in TeX Code (shortcut
6263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6264 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6271 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6284 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6291 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6292 For capital Roman numerals replace
6304 in the command above.
6305 For Arabic numerals use
6313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6320 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6337 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 You can only number 26
6346 \begin_inset space ~
6349 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6357 \begin_layout Standard
6358 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6359 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6363 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6366 \begin_layout Enumerate
6367 \begin_inset Argument 1
6370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6396 \begin_layout Enumerate
6397 \begin_inset Argument 1
6400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6423 \begin_layout Enumerate
6428 \begin_layout Enumerate
6429 \begin_inset Argument 1
6432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6456 \begin_layout Enumerate
6457 \begin_inset Argument 1
6460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6486 \begin_layout Standard
6487 For this list these commands were used:
6490 \begin_layout Standard
6501 \begin_inset Newline newline
6509 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 \begin_inset Newline newline
6527 \begin_layout Standard
6534 makes the label emphasized and
6543 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6553 lists until you change the definition.
6561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6563 \begin_inset Index idx
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6576 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6579 \begin_layout Enumerate
6580 \begin_inset Argument 1
6583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6602 \begin_inset Note Note
6605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6606 goes back to default numbering
6614 \begin_layout Enumerate
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6622 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6626 \begin_layout Standard
6627 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6632 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6633 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6637 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6645 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6653 \begin_layout Standard
6654 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6656 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6657 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6658 of a normal enumeration.
6659 There, insert the command
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6668 \begin_layout Standard
6673 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6681 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 \begin_layout Standard
6686 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6689 \begin_layout Enumerate
6690 \begin_inset Argument 1
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6709 This enumeration starts at 4
6712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6714 \begin_inset Index idx
6717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6726 \begin_layout Standard
6727 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6729 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6732 \begin_layout Itemize
6736 \begin_layout Itemize
6737 with standard spacing
6740 \begin_layout Standard
6741 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6743 Add there the command
6747 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6750 \begin_layout Itemize
6751 \begin_inset Argument 1
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6773 \begin_layout Itemize
6777 \begin_layout Itemize
6781 \begin_layout Standard
6782 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6788 \begin_inset Index idx
6791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6798 For more information see its documentation,
6799 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6809 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6811 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6812 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6816 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6819 \begin_layout Enumerate
6820 \begin_inset Argument 1
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6845 with negative indentation
6848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6849 Further Customization
6850 \begin_inset Index idx
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 Lists ! Customization
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 You can also change the style of description lists.
6867 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6874 changes the description label font, the command
6877 \begin_layout Standard
6883 \begin_layout Standard
6884 sets the list style.
6887 \begin_layout Standard
6888 An example where the command
6891 \begin_layout Standard
6896 itshape, style=nextline
6899 \begin_layout Standard
6903 \begin_layout Description
6905 \begin_inset space ~
6909 \begin_inset Argument 1
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6918 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
6920 itshape, style=nextline
6930 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
6931 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
6935 \begin_layout Description
6937 \begin_inset space ~
6940 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
6941 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
6942 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6946 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
6952 \begin_inset Index idx
6955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6956 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6962 For more information see its documentation
6963 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6972 \begin_layout Subsection
6974 \begin_inset Index idx
6977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6994 \begin_inset space ~
7002 \begin_layout Standard
7003 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7011 \begin_inset space ~
7017 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7018 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7019 In contrast, you can use the
7026 \begin_inset space ~
7031 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7032 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7036 \begin_layout Standard
7037 Of course, you're not limited to using
7044 \begin_inset space ~
7053 \begin_inset space ~
7058 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7059 some European academic papers.
7062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7066 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7078 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7079 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7083 \begin_inset space ~
7088 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7089 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7090 Here's an example of each:
7093 \begin_layout Right Address
7095 \begin_inset Newline newline
7099 \begin_inset Newline newline
7103 \begin_inset Newline newline
7106 When is it? What is today?
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7113 \begin_inset space ~
7119 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7120 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7121 Here's an example of the
7128 \begin_layout Address
7130 \begin_inset Newline newline
7133 Where do I send this
7134 \begin_inset Newline newline
7137 Your post office and country
7140 \begin_layout Standard
7141 As you can see, both
7148 \begin_inset space ~
7153 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7158 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7164 This makes sense, since
7172 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7173 Thus, you have to use
7180 arg "newline-insert newline"
7185 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7186 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7188 \begin_inset space ~
7192 \begin_inset space ~
7197 ) to start a new line in an
7204 \begin_inset space ~
7212 \begin_layout Subsection
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7217 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7218 or list of references.
7219 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7226 \begin_inset Index idx
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7243 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7244 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7245 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7246 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7260 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7261 The book document classes ignores the
7265 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7269 in a letter document class.
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment does several things for you.
7278 First, it puts the centered label
7279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7287 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7289 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7290 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7291 the subsequent text.
7292 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7293 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7297 \begin_layout Standard
7298 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7302 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7303 The new paragraph will still be in the
7308 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7309 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7313 \begin_inset Float figure
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7320 \begin_inset Graphics
7321 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7334 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7356 We would love to demonstrate the
7360 environment, but since this document is in the
7361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7368 class, we can't do this.
7369 We inserted it therefore as figure
7370 \begin_inset space ~
7374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7376 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7381 If you have never heard of an
7382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7389 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7398 \begin_inset Index idx
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7410 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7417 \begin_layout Standard
7422 environment is used to list references.
7423 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7424 only use it at the end of the document.
7436 \begin_layout Standard
7437 When you first open a
7441 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7457 depending on the document class.
7458 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7459 Each paragraph of the
7463 environment is a bibliography entry.
7468 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7469 Each new paragraph is still in the
7476 \begin_layout Standard
7477 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7478 by using a BibTeX database.
7479 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7480 phy handling, have a look at section
7481 \begin_inset space ~
7485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7487 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7494 \begin_layout Subsection
7498 \begin_inset Index idx
7501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7502 Paragraph ! LyX code
7508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7522 environment is another LyX extension.
7523 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7528 key as a fixed whitespace;
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 \begin_inset space ~
7549 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7554 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7555 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7558 arg "newline-insert newline"
7575 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7576 So, when you finish using the
7580 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7581 Also, you can nest the
7585 environment inside of others.
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7592 \begin_layout Itemize
7596 arg "newline-insert newline"
7599 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7604 \begin_inset space \space{}
7614 arg "newline-insert newline"
7620 \begin_layout Itemize
7624 arg "newline-insert newline"
7635 \begin_layout Itemize
7640 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7647 \begin_layout Itemize
7651 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7658 \begin_layout Itemize
7659 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7660 You must put at least one
7664 in any line you want blank.
7665 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7668 \begin_layout Itemize
7669 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7673 since that will insert
7678 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7681 arg "self-insert \""
7687 \begin_layout Standard
7691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7707 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7708 printf("Hello World!
7713 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7717 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7721 \begin_layout Standard
7722 This is just the standard
7723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7734 \begin_layout Standard
7739 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7740 rc-files, and so on.
7741 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7742 as if you used a typewriter.
7743 \begin_inset Index idx
7746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7747 Paragraph environments|)
7752 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7755 Program Code Listings
7760 \begin_inset space ~
7768 \begin_layout Section
7769 Nesting Environments
7770 \begin_inset Index idx
7773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7774 Nesting ! Environments
7780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7789 \begin_layout Subsection
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7794 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7796 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7798 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7800 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7812 \begin_layout Enumerate
7816 \begin_layout Enumerate
7821 \begin_layout Enumerate
7825 \begin_layout Enumerate
7830 \begin_layout Enumerate
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7835 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7836 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7838 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7840 \begin_inset space ~
7844 \begin_inset space ~
7852 \begin_inset space ~
7856 \begin_inset space ~
7861 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7863 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7866 arg "depth-increment"
7872 arg "depth-decrement"
7886 arg "depth-increment"
7892 arg "depth-decrement"
7896 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7897 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7901 \begin_layout Standard
7902 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7903 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7904 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7905 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7910 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7912 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7915 \begin_layout Subsection
7916 What You Can and Can't Nest
7919 \begin_layout Standard
7920 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7921 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
7926 than a simple yes or no.
7927 There are three types of paragraph environments:
7930 \begin_layout Itemize
7931 Completely unnestable
7934 \begin_layout Itemize
7935 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
7939 \begin_layout Itemize
7940 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
7944 \begin_layout Standard
7945 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
7946 environments have them:
7949 \begin_layout Description
7950 Unnestable Can't nest them.
7951 Can't nest into them.
7955 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 \begin_layout Itemize
7967 \begin_layout Itemize
7973 \begin_layout Itemize
7979 \begin_layout Itemize
7986 \begin_layout Description
7988 \begin_inset space ~
7991 Nestable You can nest them.
7992 You can nest other things into them.
7996 \begin_layout Itemize
8002 \begin_layout Itemize
8008 \begin_layout Itemize
8014 \begin_layout Itemize
8020 \begin_layout Itemize
8026 \begin_layout Itemize
8032 \begin_layout Itemize
8038 \begin_layout Itemize
8045 \begin_layout Description
8046 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8047 You can't nest anything into them.
8051 \begin_layout Itemize
8057 \begin_layout Itemize
8063 \begin_layout Itemize
8069 \begin_layout Itemize
8075 \begin_layout Itemize
8081 \begin_layout Itemize
8087 \begin_layout Itemize
8093 \begin_layout Itemize
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8111 \begin_layout Itemize
8117 \begin_layout Itemize
8123 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 \begin_inset space ~
8139 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 \begin_layout Standard
8147 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8155 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8165 \begin_inset space ~
8168 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8169 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8170 nested section headings violate this.
8178 \begin_layout Subsection
8179 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8180 \begin_inset Index idx
8183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8184 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8194 affected by nesting anyhow.
8198 \begin_layout Itemize
8202 \begin_layout Itemize
8206 \begin_layout Itemize
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 Figures and tables in
8224 are not affected by this.
8229 Have a look at section
8230 \begin_inset space ~
8234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8236 reference "sec:Floats"
8240 for more information about
8247 \begin_layout Standard
8248 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8249 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8253 \begin_layout Standard
8254 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8262 of its own, it behaves just like a
8263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8270 paragraph environment.
8271 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8276 Here's an example with a table:
8279 \begin_layout Enumerate
8284 \begin_layout Enumerate
8285 This is (a) and it's nested.
8289 \begin_layout Standard
8290 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8296 \begin_layout Standard
8298 \begin_inset Tabular
8299 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8300 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8387 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8394 \begin_layout Enumerate
8396 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8400 \begin_layout Enumerate
8404 \begin_layout Standard
8405 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8408 \begin_layout Enumerate
8413 \begin_layout Enumerate
8414 This is (a) and it's nested.
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8419 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8427 \begin_inset Tabular
8428 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8429 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8431 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8522 \begin_layout Enumerate
8529 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8532 \begin_layout Enumerate
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8544 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8547 \begin_layout Enumerate
8552 \begin_layout Enumerate
8553 This is (a) and it's nested.
8556 \begin_layout Standard
8557 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8565 \begin_inset Tabular
8566 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8567 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8661 \begin_layout Enumerate
8663 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8670 \begin_layout Enumerate
8674 \begin_layout Standard
8675 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8681 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8682 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8686 \begin_layout Subsection
8687 Usage and General Features
8690 \begin_layout Standard
8691 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8700 is the innermost possible depth.
8701 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8704 \begin_layout Enumerate
8705 level #1 – outermost
8709 \begin_layout Enumerate
8714 \begin_layout Enumerate
8719 \begin_layout Enumerate
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Standard
8739 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8740 both of them in the example.
8741 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8751 For example, if we tried to nest another
8756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8763 , we would get errors.
8766 \begin_layout Subsection
8768 \begin_inset Index idx
8771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8781 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8782 We have several examples of nested environments.
8783 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8788 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8791 \begin_layout Labeling
8792 \labelwidthstring MMM
8793 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8802 \begin_layout Labeling
8803 \labelwidthstring MMM
8804 #2-a This is level #2.
8805 We created it by using
8808 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8814 arg "depth-increment"
8821 \begin_layout Labeling
8822 \labelwidthstring MMM
8823 #3-a This is level #3.
8824 This time, we just enter
8831 arg "depth-increment"
8835 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8839 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8845 arg "depth-increment"
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8857 environment, nested inside of
8858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8866 So, it's at level #4.
8867 We did this by entering
8870 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8876 arg "depth-increment"
8879 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8884 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8900 \begin_layout Standard
8905 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8908 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8914 \begin_layout Labeling
8915 \labelwidthstring MMM
8916 #4-a This is level #4.
8920 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8923 and changed the paragraph environment back to
8928 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
8932 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
8937 keep nesting things inside
8938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8949 \begin_layout Labeling
8950 \labelwidthstring MMM
8951 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
8956 \begin_layout Labeling
8957 \labelwidthstring MMM
8958 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
8959 and this is level #6.
8960 By now, you should know how we made these two.
8964 \begin_layout Labeling
8965 \labelwidthstring MMM
8966 #5-b Back to level #5.
8970 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8976 arg "depth-decrement"
8983 \begin_layout Labeling
8984 \labelwidthstring MMM
8988 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8994 arg "depth-decrement"
8997 , we're back at level #4.
9001 \begin_layout Labeling
9002 \labelwidthstring MMM
9003 #3-b Back to level #3.
9004 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9008 \begin_layout Labeling
9009 \labelwidthstring MMM
9010 #2-b Back to level #2.
9015 \begin_layout Labeling
9016 \labelwidthstring MMM
9017 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9018 After this sentence, we will enter
9022 and change the paragraph environment back to
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 We could have also used the
9046 environment in place of the
9051 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9055 Example 2: Inheritance
9058 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9059 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9062 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9071 arg "depth-increment"
9075 \begin_inset Newline newline
9078 which, we will change to the
9086 \begin_layout Enumerate
9091 environment, at level #2.
9094 \begin_layout Enumerate
9095 Notice how the nested
9099 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9103 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9107 \begin_layout Standard
9108 We ended this example by entering
9113 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9117 and reset the nesting depth by using
9120 arg "depth-decrement"
9126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9127 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9136 \begin_inset Argument 1
9139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9140 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9148 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 This is level #1, in an
9153 paragraph environment.
9154 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9169 arg "depth-increment"
9173 Now, what happens if we nest an
9177 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9178 label be? An asterisk?
9182 \begin_layout Itemize
9192 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9193 So, its label is a bullet.
9194 (We got here by using
9197 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9203 arg "depth-increment"
9206 , then changing the environment to
9214 \begin_layout Itemize
9215 Here's level #4, produced using
9218 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9224 arg "depth-increment"
9228 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9233 \begin_layout Enumerate
9234 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9236 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9241 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9245 , because we are in the
9253 environment (that is, it is an
9268 \begin_layout Enumerate
9273 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9274 type of numbering does LyX use?
9277 \begin_layout Enumerate
9278 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9281 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9284 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9287 \begin_layout Enumerate
9291 arg "depth-decrement"
9294 to decrease the depth after the next
9297 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9310 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9313 numeral as the label.Why?
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9326 Notice, however, that LyX
9330 reset the counter for the label.
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9344 arg "depth-decrement"
9347 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9348 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9349 into the twofold-nested
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 The same thing happens if we do another
9361 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9367 arg "depth-decrement"
9370 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9374 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9379 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9393 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9399 The same rule applies for the
9403 environment, as well.
9406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9407 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9410 \begin_layout Enumerate
9411 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9412 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9413 the same detail with how we did it.
9422 \begin_layout Standard
9430 arg "depth-increment"
9437 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9438 the example in parentheses someplace.
9439 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9440 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9441 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9450 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9455 Now we will add verse.
9456 \begin_inset Newline newline
9459 It will get much worse.
9460 \begin_inset Newline newline
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9481 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9482 \begin_inset Newline newline
9485 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9486 \begin_inset Newline newline
9492 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9505 \begin_layout Standard
9506 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9514 \begin_inset Tabular
9515 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9516 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9517 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9518 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9607 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9617 arg "depth-increment"
9623 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9640 \begin_layout Enumerate
9645 : level #1) This is another item.
9646 Note that selecting a
9650 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9651 3 times to put the table inside the
9659 \begin_layout Quotation
9660 We're now ending the
9664 list and changing to
9669 We're still at level #1.
9670 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9671 The next set of paragraphs is a
9672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9679 We will nest both the
9686 \begin_inset space ~
9691 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9695 for the letter body.
9699 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9702 to preserve the depth.
9703 Remember that you need to use
9706 arg "newline-insert newline"
9709 to create multiple lines inside the
9716 \begin_inset space ~
9726 \begin_layout Right Address
9728 \begin_inset Newline newline
9731 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9732 \begin_inset Newline newline
9738 \begin_layout Address
9740 \begin_inset space ~
9746 \begin_layout Quotation
9747 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9751 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9752 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9753 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9754 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9755 as soon as possible.
9756 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9759 \begin_layout Quotation
9760 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9761 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9762 with your order, along with payment.
9765 \begin_layout Quotation
9766 We thank you again for your patience.
9769 \begin_layout Address
9771 \begin_inset Newline newline
9778 \begin_layout Quotation
9779 That ends that example!
9782 \begin_layout Standard
9783 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9784 just a few keystrokes.
9785 We could have easily nested an
9806 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9809 \begin_layout Section
9810 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9811 \begin_inset Index idx
9814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9824 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9825 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9826 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9827 be broken at the end of a line.
9828 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9832 \begin_layout Subsection
9834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9836 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9841 \begin_inset Index idx
9844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9853 \begin_layout Standard
9854 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9856 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9860 Further documentation is given in section
9861 \begin_inset Newline newline
9865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9867 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9875 \begin_layout Standard
9876 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9891 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9900 A protected space is set with
9902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9903 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9905 \begin_inset space ~
9913 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9919 \begin_layout Subsection
9921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9923 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
9928 \begin_inset Index idx
9931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9932 Spacing ! Horizontal
9940 \begin_layout Standard
9941 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
9943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9944 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9948 The length units are listed in Appendix
9949 \begin_inset space ~
9953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9955 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
9962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9966 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
9971 \begin_inset Index idx
9974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9983 \begin_layout Standard
9984 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
9985 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
9986 at the ends of sentences.
9987 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
9988 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
9989 followed by a period; see section
9990 \begin_inset space ~
9994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9996 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10001 To insert a normal space, select
10003 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10004 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10006 \begin_inset space ~
10014 arg "space-insert normal"
10020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10024 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10029 \begin_inset Index idx
10032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10041 \begin_layout Standard
10043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10050 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10059 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10060 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10061 inside abbreviations:
10064 \begin_layout Quote
10066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10070 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10073 \begin_layout Standard
10074 or between values and units.
10075 Compare for example this:
10076 \begin_inset Newline newline
10080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 10 kg (normal space
10090 \begin_layout Standard
10091 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10093 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10094 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10096 \begin_inset space ~
10104 arg "space-insert thin"
10110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10114 \begin_layout Standard
10115 You can also insert the following space types:
10118 \begin_layout Description
10120 \begin_inset space ~
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10127 space A line with a
10128 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10132 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10136 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10139 negative thin space between the arrows.
10142 \begin_layout Description
10144 \begin_inset space ~
10148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10152 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10156 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10160 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10164 \begin_inset space ~
10168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10171 em) space between the arrows.
10174 \begin_layout Description
10176 \begin_inset space ~
10180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10184 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10188 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10192 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10196 \begin_inset space ~
10200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10203 em) space between the arrows.
10206 \begin_layout Description
10208 \begin_inset space ~
10212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10216 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10220 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10224 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10228 \begin_inset space ~
10232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10235 em) space between the arrows.
10238 \begin_layout Description
10240 \begin_inset space ~
10244 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10248 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10253 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10260 cm space between the arrows.
10263 \begin_layout Standard
10265 \begin_inset space ~
10269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10271 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10275 lists the different space sizes.
10278 \begin_layout Standard
10279 \begin_inset Float table
10284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10286 \begin_inset Caption
10288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10291 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10295 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10305 \begin_inset Tabular
10306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10307 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10532 \begin_inset Index idx
10535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10544 \begin_layout Standard
10545 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10546 in a uniform fashion.
10547 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10548 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10549 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10550 equally between themselves.
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10557 \begin_layout Quote
10559 This is on the left side
10560 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10563 This is on the right
10566 \begin_layout Quote
10569 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10573 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10579 \begin_layout Quote
10582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10586 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10590 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10596 \begin_layout Standard
10597 That was an example in the
10603 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10611 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10614 is one in a standard paragraph.
10615 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10619 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10622 \begin_layout Standard
10623 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10626 \begin_inset space ~
10631 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10634 \begin_layout Standard
10636 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10640 \begin_inset space ~
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10648 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10652 \begin_inset space ~
10658 \begin_layout Standard
10660 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10664 \begin_inset space ~
10670 \begin_layout Standard
10672 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10676 \begin_inset space ~
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10684 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10688 \begin_inset space ~
10694 \begin_layout Standard
10696 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10700 \begin_inset space ~
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10719 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10720 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10721 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10725 option in the space dialog.
10733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10737 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10742 \begin_inset Index idx
10745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10754 \begin_layout Standard
10755 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10756 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10759 \begin_layout Standard
10760 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10763 What is correct English?:
10764 \begin_inset Newline newline
10768 \begin_inset Newline newline
10772 \begin_inset space ~
10775 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10776 \begin_inset Newline newline
10780 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10791 \begin_inset Newline newline
10795 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10812 \begin_layout Standard
10814 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset space ~
10823 \begin_inset space ~
10827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10831 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10833 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10834 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10838 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10844 \begin_inset space ~
10848 \begin_inset space ~
10852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10855 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10864 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10865 That is why it is named
10866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10874 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10875 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10879 \begin_layout Subsection
10881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10883 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10888 \begin_inset Index idx
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10901 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10903 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10904 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10906 \begin_inset space ~
10912 There you find the following sizes:
10915 \begin_layout Standard
10928 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
10933 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
10935 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10936 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10944 \begin_inset Index idx
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10948 Document ! Settings
10953 for the paragraph separation.
10954 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
10965 \begin_layout Standard
10971 \begin_inset Index idx
10974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
10981 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
10986 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
10987 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
10996 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 s are described in section
11006 \begin_inset space ~
11010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11012 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11021 If there are several
11025 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11026 You can therefore use
11030 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11033 \begin_layout Standard
11038 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11045 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11063 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11064 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11076 \begin_layout Subsection
11077 Paragraph Alignment
11078 \begin_inset Index idx
11081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 Paragraph ! Alignment
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11093 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11096 dialog (toolbar button
11099 arg "layout-paragraph"
11103 There are five possibilities:
11106 \begin_layout Itemize
11114 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11120 \begin_layout Itemize
11128 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11134 \begin_layout Itemize
11142 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11148 \begin_layout Itemize
11156 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11162 \begin_layout Itemize
11170 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11176 \begin_layout Standard
11177 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11178 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11179 the left and right margins.
11180 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11183 \begin_layout Standard
11185 This paragraph is right aligned,
11188 \begin_layout Standard
11190 this one is centered,
11193 \begin_layout Standard
11195 this one is left aligned.
11198 \begin_layout Subsection
11200 \begin_inset Index idx
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 Page breaks ! Forced
11210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11212 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11219 \begin_layout Standard
11220 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11221 can force a page break where you want one.
11222 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11223 Only if you use a lot of
11227 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11230 \begin_layout Standard
11231 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11232 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11236 have to change the page breaking.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11242 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11244 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11245 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11247 \begin_inset space ~
11253 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11255 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11256 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11258 \begin_inset space ~
11263 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11265 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11266 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11269 \begin_layout Standard
11270 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11271 at the top of a page.
11272 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11273 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11274 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11275 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11279 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11283 to learn more about
11290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11294 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11299 \begin_inset Index idx
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 Page breaks ! Clear
11311 \begin_layout Standard
11312 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11313 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11314 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11315 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11316 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11320 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11322 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11323 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11325 \begin_inset space ~
11331 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11333 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11334 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11336 \begin_inset space ~
11340 \begin_inset space ~
11345 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11346 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11349 \begin_layout Subsection
11351 \begin_inset Index idx
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11363 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11370 \begin_layout Standard
11371 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11373 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11375 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11376 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11378 \begin_inset space ~
11382 \begin_inset space ~
11390 arg "newline-insert newline"
11394 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11396 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11397 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11399 \begin_inset space ~
11403 \begin_inset space ~
11411 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11414 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11416 This is useful to avoid
11417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11424 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11427 \begin_layout Standard
11428 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11429 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11430 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11431 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11432 \begin_inset space ~
11436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11438 reference "sec:Quote"
11443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11445 reference "sec:Verse"
11450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11452 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11459 \begin_layout Subsection
11461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11463 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11468 \begin_inset Index idx
11471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11480 \begin_layout Standard
11482 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11493 \begin_layout Standard
11497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11498 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11500 \begin_inset space ~
11505 you can insert horizontal lines.
11506 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11507 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11508 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11524 \begin_layout Section
11525 Characters and Symbols
11528 \begin_layout Standard
11529 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11530 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11531 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11539 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11543 for information on how this is done.
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11547 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11552 dialog via the menu
11554 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11555 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11570 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11571 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11572 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11580 \begin_layout Section
11581 Fonts and Text Styles
11582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11584 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11591 \begin_layout Subsection
11593 \begin_inset Index idx
11596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11605 \begin_layout Standard
11606 There are two types of fonts:
11609 \begin_layout Description
11611 \begin_inset space ~
11615 \begin_inset Index idx
11618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11624 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11629 characters) in the font.
11630 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11631 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11632 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11633 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11634 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11635 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11636 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11637 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11641 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11642 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11643 sizes than at small ones.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11658 \begin_inset space ~
11666 \begin_layout Description
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11672 \begin_inset Index idx
11675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11681 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11682 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11683 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11684 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11685 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11686 image manipulation program.
11687 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11688 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11692 pixels high up to 34
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11696 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11697 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11698 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11700 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11701 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11702 \begin_inset Newline newline
11705 Bitmap fonts are named
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11713 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11717 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11718 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11719 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11720 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11721 use scalable fonts.
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11725 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11728 \begin_layout Standard
11729 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11730 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11731 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11732 font to emphasize text, you use an
11733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11741 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11742 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11746 \begin_layout Subsection
11748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11750 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11758 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11759 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11760 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11762 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11763 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11764 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11765 to a word processor.
11766 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11767 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11768 across different machines.
11769 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11770 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11772 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11780 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11785 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11786 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11791 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11792 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11794 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11795 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11796 that is installed on your system.
11797 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11800 \begin_layout Standard
11801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11809 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11810 es; so you might have to experiment.
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11827 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11828 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11836 \begin_layout Subsection
11837 Document Font and Font size
11838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11840 name "sub:Document-Font"
11845 \begin_inset Index idx
11848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 \begin_inset Index idx
11858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_layout Standard
11868 You can set the document fonts in the
11870 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11874 \begin_inset Index idx
11877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11878 Document ! Settings
11888 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11889 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11901 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11902 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11903 with the roman font.
11906 \begin_layout Standard
11913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11923 This requires that you use
11929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11968 as the output format, i.
11969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11973 \begin_inset space \space{}
11976 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
11977 \begin_inset space ~
11981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11983 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11988 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
11989 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
11991 \begin_inset space ~
11994 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
11995 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
11996 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
11998 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12001 \begin_layout Standard
12002 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12007 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12012 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12013 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12020 \begin_inset space ~
12026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12039 European Computer Modern
12042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12049 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12061 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12062 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12067 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12075 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12081 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12082 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12085 \begin_layout Itemize
12089 \begin_inset space ~
12094 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12107 \begin_inset space ~
12112 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12116 as the default font.
12117 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12118 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12121 \begin_inset space ~
12134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12135 One difference is improved kerning.
12143 \begin_layout Itemize
12147 \begin_inset space ~
12151 \begin_inset space ~
12156 fonts in (the rare) case that
12159 \begin_inset space ~
12164 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12179 Virtual means that it
12180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12191 -glyphs from other fonts.
12192 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12214 Loading the LaTeX-package
12219 \begin_inset Index idx
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12223 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12228 with the document preamble line
12229 \begin_inset Newline newline
12236 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12237 \begin_inset Newline newline
12242 will fix the guillemet problem.
12247 and that accented characters are not
12251 glyph, but built of
12255 characters, the accent and the letter.
12256 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12262 If you search for example for the French word
12263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12270 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12279 and not for the glyph
12280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12284 \begin_inset space ~
12288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 \begin_layout Itemize
12295 If you do not like the look of
12303 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12314 \begin_inset space ~
12324 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12325 \begin_inset space ~
12328 serif and typewriter fonts,
12332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12333 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12340 \begin_inset space ~
12349 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12354 \begin_inset space \space{}
12362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12366 \begin_inset space \space{}
12372 \begin_inset space ~
12380 \begin_inset space ~
12390 but you can also select your own.
12391 \begin_inset Newline newline
12394 The differences between roman,
12397 \begin_inset space ~
12406 fonts are explained in section
12407 \begin_inset space ~
12411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12413 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12418 \begin_inset Newline newline
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12429 was originally designed for newspapers.
12430 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12431 into the small newspaper columns.
12435 \begin_inset space ~
12440 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12443 \begin_layout Standard
12444 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12457 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12462 depends on the class you are using.
12463 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12467 Note that the font size is the
12472 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12473 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12474 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12483 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12490 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12501 \begin_inset space ~
12506 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12511 serif or typewriter.
12516 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12526 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12529 \begin_layout Standard
12538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12547 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12553 \begin_inset Index idx
12556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12569 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12574 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12575 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12585 Use Old Style Figures
12589 Use True Small Caps
12592 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12595 Use Old Style Figures
12597 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12599 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12607 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12611 Use True Small Caps
12613 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12614 of scaled capitals.
12615 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12616 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12619 \begin_layout Standard
12624 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12625 a font to display the script characters.
12629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12630 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12635 \begin_inset Index idx
12638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12639 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12644 So this has no effect for the document language
12658 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12674 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12675 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12676 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12678 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12681 dialog, see section
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12688 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12700 \begin_layout Subsection
12701 Using Different Character Styles
12702 \begin_inset Index idx
12705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 \begin_layout Standard
12725 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12726 certain paragraph environments.
12727 LyX supports two character styles,
12736 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12745 style, do one of the following:
12748 \begin_layout Itemize
12749 click on the toolbar button
12758 \begin_layout Itemize
12759 use the key binding
12768 \begin_layout Standard
12769 These commands are all toggles.
12774 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12778 One typically uses the
12782 style for proper names.
12784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12791 is the original author of LyX.
12792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12798 \begin_layout Standard
12799 A more widely used character style is the
12804 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12811 \begin_layout Itemize
12812 clicking on the toolbar button
12821 \begin_layout Itemize
12822 using the keybindings
12831 \begin_layout Standard
12836 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12837 es use a different font.
12840 \begin_layout Standard
12841 We've been using the
12845 style all over the place in this document.
12846 Here's one more example:
12849 \begin_layout Quotation
12852 Do not overuse character styles!
12855 \begin_layout Standard
12856 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12857 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12858 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12859 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12863 \begin_layout Standard
12864 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12872 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12877 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12883 arg "dialog-show character"
12889 \begin_layout Subsection
12890 Fine-Tuning with the
12895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12897 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12902 \begin_inset Index idx
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 \begin_layout Standard
12915 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12916 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12917 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12918 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12919 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12920 from ordinary dialog.
12923 \begin_layout Standard
12924 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12925 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12926 \begin_inset Newline newline
12929 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
12930 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12933 \begin_layout Standard
12934 To use custom character styles, open the
12936 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12941 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12944 dialog or press the toolbar button
12947 arg "dialog-show character"
12951 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12952 font property that you can choose.
12953 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12956 \begin_inset space ~
12961 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12966 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12967 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12968 environments all at once.
12971 \begin_layout Standard
12972 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12987 \begin_layout Labeling
12988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 The possible options are:
13006 \begin_layout Labeling
13007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13012 This is the Roman font family.
13013 Normally a serif font.
13014 It's also the default family.
13024 \begin_layout Labeling
13025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13029 \begin_inset space ~
13036 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13048 \begin_layout Labeling
13049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13056 This is the Typewriter font family.
13062 arg "font-typewriter"
13071 \begin_layout Labeling
13072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13077 This corresponds to the print weight.
13082 \begin_layout Labeling
13083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13088 This is the Medium font series.
13089 It's also the default series.
13092 \begin_layout Labeling
13093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13100 This is the Bold font series.
13113 \begin_layout Labeling
13114 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13119 As the name implies.
13124 \begin_layout Labeling
13125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13130 This is the Upright font shape.
13131 It's also the default shape.
13134 \begin_layout Labeling
13135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13149 s the Italic font shape
13155 \begin_layout Labeling
13156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13163 This is the Slanted font shape
13165 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13168 \begin_layout Labeling
13169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13180 This is the Small caps font shape
13187 \begin_layout Labeling
13188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13193 Alters the text color.
13194 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13203 , which means that the document default color set in
13205 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13206 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13217 is used, you can choose between
13250 \begin_inset Index idx
13253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13262 \begin_layout Labeling
13263 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13268 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13269 the language of the document.
13270 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13272 \begin_inset Newline newline
13275 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13276 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13277 When using the spell checking (see section
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13284 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13288 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13291 \begin_layout Labeling
13292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13297 Alters the size of the font.
13298 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13299 proportional to the document font size.
13300 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13301 what you want to do.
13306 \begin_layout Labeling
13307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13328 arg "font-size tiny"
13334 \begin_layout Labeling
13335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13356 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13362 \begin_layout Labeling
13363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13384 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13390 \begin_layout Labeling
13391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13412 arg "font-size small"
13418 \begin_layout Labeling
13419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13433 It's also the default size.
13437 arg "font-size normal"
13443 \begin_layout Labeling
13444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13465 arg "font-size large"
13471 \begin_layout Labeling
13472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13493 arg "font-size larger"
13499 \begin_layout Labeling
13500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13521 arg "font-size largest"
13527 \begin_layout Labeling
13528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13549 arg "font-size huge"
13555 \begin_layout Labeling
13556 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13577 arg "font-size giant"
13583 \begin_layout Labeling
13584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13589 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13609 arg "font-size increase"
13615 \begin_layout Labeling
13616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13621 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 arg "font-size decrease"
13648 \begin_layout Standard
13653 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13654 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13655 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13656 — use those instead.
13657 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13660 \begin_layout Labeling
13661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13666 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13671 \begin_layout Labeling
13672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13679 This is text with emphasize on
13682 This might seem like the same as
13686 , but it is actually a bit different.
13692 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13694 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13697 \begin_layout Labeling
13698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13705 This is text with Underbar on.
13711 arg "font-underline"
13717 \begin_inset Newline newline
13722 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13723 when you could not change fonts.
13724 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13725 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13729 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13732 \begin_layout Labeling
13733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13737 \begin_inset space ~
13744 This is text with Double underbar on.
13750 arg "font-underunderline"
13754 \begin_inset Newline newline
13757 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13758 about double underbar.
13761 \begin_layout Labeling
13762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13773 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13779 arg "font-underwave"
13783 \begin_inset Newline newline
13786 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13787 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13790 \begin_layout Labeling
13791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13798 This is text with Strikeout on.
13804 arg "font-strikeout"
13808 \begin_inset Newline newline
13811 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13812 changed in the meantime.
13815 \begin_layout Labeling
13816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13823 This is text with Noun on.
13830 , this is a logical attribute.
13831 Normally it's equivalent to
13834 \begin_inset space ~
13843 \begin_layout Standard
13844 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13845 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13847 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13849 \begin_inset space ~
13852 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13858 arg "dialog-show character"
13861 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13862 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13865 arg "textstyle-apply"
13869 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13873 \begin_layout Standard
13874 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13881 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13882 (suppose you just set the shape to
13883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13901 \begin_inset space ~
13913 \begin_layout Standard
13914 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13934 \begin_layout Itemize
13940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13947 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13965 \begin_inset Newline newline
13969 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13983 \begin_inset Note Note
13986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13987 For more on phantoms see section
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13994 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14004 \begin_inset Newline newline
14010 \begin_layout Itemize
14015 fonts use characters with serifs.
14016 These are the small
14017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14024 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14025 The following example shows the difference:
14026 \begin_inset Newline newline
14030 \begin_inset Newline newline
14035 text without serifs
14038 \begin_inset Newline newline
14041 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14042 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14049 \begin_layout Itemize
14054 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14055 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14056 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14059 \begin_layout Standard
14060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14067 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14068 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14071 \begin_inset space ~
14076 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14077 the property to be removed.
14078 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14079 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14080 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14098 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14099 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14107 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14111 \begin_inset space ~
14116 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14127 If you, for example, set
14128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14146 \begin_inset space ~
14151 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14160 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14163 \begin_layout Standard
14164 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14165 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14168 \begin_layout Section
14169 Printing and Previewing
14172 \begin_layout Subsection
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14178 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14179 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14180 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14181 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14183 Additional Features
14188 \begin_layout Standard
14189 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14190 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14191 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14192 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14193 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14194 This happens in two stages:
14197 \begin_layout Enumerate
14198 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14199 generating a file with the extension,
14200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14214 \begin_layout Enumerate
14215 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14219 file to produce printable output.
14223 \begin_layout Subsection
14224 Output file formats
14225 \begin_inset Index idx
14228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14237 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14245 Simple text (ASCII)
14246 \begin_inset Index idx
14249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14250 File formats ! ASCII
14258 \begin_layout Standard
14259 This file type has the extension
14260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14272 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14276 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14283 \begin_layout Standard
14284 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14286 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14287 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14289 \begin_inset space ~
14296 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14297 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14299 \begin_inset space ~
14303 \begin_inset space ~
14309 The latter will first internally export to PostScript and then do the conversio
14313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14315 \begin_inset Index idx
14318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14319 File formats ! LaTeX
14327 \begin_layout Standard
14328 This file type has the extension
14329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14340 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14342 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14343 it manually with console commands.
14344 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14345 you view or export your document.
14348 \begin_layout Standard
14349 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14351 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14352 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14367 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14368 \begin_inset space ~
14372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14374 reference "sub:Export"
14381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14383 \begin_inset Index idx
14386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14395 \begin_layout Standard
14396 This file type has the extension
14397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14417 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14418 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14419 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14423 \begin_layout Standard
14424 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14425 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14426 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14427 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14428 when you view the DVI.
14429 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14432 \begin_layout Standard
14433 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14435 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14436 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14441 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14442 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14444 \begin_inset space ~
14451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14461 The latter option uses the program
14470 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14471 font access (see section
14472 \begin_inset space ~
14476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14478 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14483 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14484 standard TeX processor.
14487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14489 \begin_inset Index idx
14492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14493 File formats ! PostScript
14501 \begin_layout Standard
14502 This file type has the extension
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14515 PostScript was developed by the company
14519 as a printer language.
14520 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14522 PostScript can be seen as a
14523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14526 programming language
14527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14530 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14535 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-packa
14541 \begin_inset Index idx
14544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14545 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14555 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14558 \begin_layout Standard
14559 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14563 Encapsulated PostScript
14564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14567 (EPS, file extension
14568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14580 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14581 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14587 \begin_inset space \space{}
14591 \begin_inset space ~
14594 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14595 \begin_inset space ~
14598 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14599 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14600 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14601 EPS to avoid this problem.
14604 \begin_layout Standard
14605 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14607 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14608 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14616 \begin_inset Index idx
14619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14626 \begin_inset Index idx
14629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14638 \begin_layout Standard
14639 This file type has the extension
14640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14656 Portable Document Format
14657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14664 was derived from PostScript.
14665 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14674 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14675 looks exactly the same.
14678 \begin_layout Standard
14679 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14683 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14687 (JPG, file extension
14688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14715 Portable Network Graphics
14716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14719 (PNG, file extension
14720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14732 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14733 background to one of these formats.
14734 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14735 will slow down your workflow.
14736 So we recommend using images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14739 \begin_layout Standard
14740 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14742 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14748 \begin_layout Description
14750 \begin_inset space ~
14753 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14757 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14758 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14762 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14763 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14766 \begin_layout Description
14768 \begin_inset space ~
14771 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14775 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14779 \begin_layout Description
14781 \begin_inset space ~
14784 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14788 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14791 \begin_layout Description
14793 \begin_inset space ~
14800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14807 X) This uses the program
14811 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14816 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14817 font access (see section
14818 \begin_inset space ~
14822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14824 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14829 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example verticall
14830 y written Japanese.
14833 \begin_layout Description
14835 \begin_inset space ~
14842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14849 X) This uses the program
14853 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14858 is an even newer engine, derived from
14862 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14863 access (see section
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14870 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14875 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14876 standard TeX processor.
14879 \begin_layout Standard
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14892 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14893 works without problems.
14894 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14895 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14899 \begin_inset space ~
14906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14918 \begin_inset space ~
14925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14934 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14944 \begin_inset Index idx
14947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14948 FileFormats ! XHTML
14954 \begin_inset Index idx
14957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14966 \begin_layout Standard
14967 This file type has the extension
14968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14980 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
14981 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
14982 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
14983 suitable for the purpose.
14984 For the math output you can choose in the menu
14986 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14987 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14990 between different formats, which are described in section
14992 Math Output in XHTML
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15005 \begin_layout Standard
15006 XHTML output remains
15007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15014 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15017 LyX and the World Wide Web
15021 Additional Features
15023 manual, for more information.
15026 \begin_layout Standard
15027 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15029 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15030 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15036 \begin_layout Subsection
15038 \begin_inset Index idx
15041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15050 \begin_layout Standard
15051 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15052 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15061 or use the toolbar button
15068 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15069 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15076 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15080 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15088 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15093 Further output formats can be selected via
15095 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15098 or the toolbar button
15099 \begin_inset Graphics
15100 filename ../images/view-others.png
15102 groupId toolbarbuttons
15109 \begin_layout Standard
15110 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15111 viewer window using the menu
15113 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15118 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15119 Update (Other Formats)
15124 \begin_layout Standard
15125 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15127 To have a real output, export your document.
15130 \begin_layout Subsection
15131 Printing the File from within LyX
15132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15134 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15141 \begin_layout Standard
15142 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15143 it directly from within LyX.
15144 To print a file, select the menu
15146 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15149 or click on the toolbar button
15152 arg "dialog-show print"
15156 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15157 This file is then processed by the program
15161 to PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15166 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15169 \begin_layout Standard
15170 You can choose to print only even-numbered or odd-numbered pages — this
15171 is useful for printing on two sides: You can re-insert the pages after
15172 printing one set to print on the other side.
15173 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15174 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15175 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15178 \begin_layout Standard
15179 You can set the following print parameters in the
15182 \begin_inset space ~
15190 \begin_layout Labeling
15191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15196 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15201 Note that this printer name is for the program
15210 has to be configured for this printer name.
15211 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15212 \begin_inset space ~
15216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15218 reference "sub:Printer"
15227 The printer should understand PostScript.
15230 \begin_layout Labeling
15231 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15236 The name of a file to print to.
15237 The output will be a PostScript file.
15238 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15242 \begin_layout Section
15243 A few Words about Typography
15244 \begin_inset Index idx
15247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_layout Subsection
15257 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15258 \begin_inset Index idx
15261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15268 \begin_inset Index idx
15271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15280 \begin_layout Standard
15282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15293 character comes in four lengths: the
15305 , and the minus sign:
15306 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15312 \begin_layout Standard
15313 \begin_inset Tabular
15314 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15315 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15316 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15317 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15318 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15319 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15348 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15388 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15413 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15415 \begin_inset space ~
15418 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15425 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15450 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15452 \begin_inset space ~
15455 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15476 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15510 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15516 \begin_layout Standard
15517 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15529 character multiple times in a row.
15530 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15531 the final output, but not in LyX.
15533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15563 \begin_layout Standard
15564 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15565 math mode and has a length of its own.
15566 Here are some examples:
15569 \begin_layout Enumerate
15570 line- and page-breaks
15571 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15581 \begin_layout Enumerate
15583 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15593 \begin_layout Enumerate
15594 Oh — there's a dash.
15595 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15605 \begin_layout Enumerate
15606 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15620 \begin_layout Subsection
15622 \begin_inset Index idx
15625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15634 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15641 \begin_layout Standard
15642 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15643 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15648 \begin_inset Index idx
15651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15652 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15657 following the rules of the document language.
15660 \begin_layout Standard
15661 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15666 font and with unusual constructs, like
15667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15675 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15677 This is done with the menu
15679 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15680 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15682 \begin_inset space ~
15688 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15689 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15692 \begin_layout Standard
15693 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15694 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15704 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15712 as a hyphenation possibility.
15713 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15714 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15715 as described in section
15716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 Prevent Hyphenation
15720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15726 \begin_inset space ~
15734 \begin_layout Subsection
15736 \begin_inset Index idx
15739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15749 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15752 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15759 \begin_layout Standard
15760 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15761 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15762 LaTeX then adds the
15763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15766 appropriate amount of space
15767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15771 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15773 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15774 gets after another word.
15777 \begin_layout Standard
15778 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15779 not work in all cases.
15781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15792 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15793 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15796 \begin_layout Standard
15797 Here are some examples of
15801 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15804 \begin_layout Itemize
15809 \begin_layout Itemize
15814 \begin_layout Standard
15815 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15818 \begin_layout Itemize
15820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15824 this is too much space!
15827 \begin_layout Itemize
15832 \begin_layout Standard
15833 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15836 \begin_layout Standard
15837 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15840 \begin_layout Enumerate
15844 \begin_inset space ~
15849 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15850 \begin_inset space ~
15854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15856 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15861 \begin_inset Index idx
15864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15865 Spaces ! inter-word
15873 \begin_layout Enumerate
15877 \begin_inset space ~
15882 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15889 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15894 \begin_inset Index idx
15897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15906 \begin_layout Enumerate
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15914 \begin_inset space ~
15918 \begin_inset space ~
15925 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15927 \begin_inset space ~
15932 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15933 This function is also bound to
15936 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15942 \begin_layout Standard
15943 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15946 \begin_layout Itemize
15948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15952 \begin_inset space \space{}
15955 this is too much space!
15958 \begin_layout Itemize
15959 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15963 \begin_layout Standard
15964 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15965 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15966 will take care of this.
15969 \begin_layout Standard
15970 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15974 \begin_inset space ~
15979 feature described in section
15985 Additional Features
15990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15992 \begin_inset Index idx
15995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 Typography ! Quotes
16002 \begin_inset Index idx
16005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16038 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16039 and use a closing quote at the end.
16041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16049 The keyboard character,
16053 , generates this automatically.
16056 \begin_layout Standard
16057 You can specify what character the
16061 key produces using the submenu
16067 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16071 \begin_inset Index idx
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16075 Document ! Settings
16085 There are six choices:
16088 \begin_layout Labeling
16089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16101 Use quotes like this
16102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16112 \begin_layout Labeling
16113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16116 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16120 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16126 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16130 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16136 \begin_layout Labeling
16137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16140 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16144 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16150 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16154 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16164 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16168 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16174 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16178 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16184 \begin_layout Labeling
16185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16188 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16192 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16198 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16202 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16208 \begin_layout Labeling
16209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16212 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16216 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16222 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16226 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16232 \begin_layout Subsection
16234 \begin_inset Index idx
16237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 Typography ! Ligatures
16244 \begin_inset Index idx
16247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16278 name "sub:Ligatures"
16285 \begin_layout Standard
16286 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16287 print them as single characters.
16288 These groups are known as
16293 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16295 Here are the standard ligatures:
16298 \begin_layout Itemize
16302 \begin_layout Itemize
16306 \begin_layout Itemize
16310 \begin_layout Itemize
16314 \begin_layout Itemize
16318 \begin_layout Standard
16319 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16322 \begin_layout Standard
16323 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16324 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16332 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16348 To break a ligature, use
16350 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16351 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16353 \begin_inset space ~
16360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16371 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16388 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16396 \begin_layout Subsection
16398 \begin_inset Index idx
16401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16410 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16417 \begin_layout Standard
16418 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16419 characters in different sizes and heights.
16420 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16421 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset Note Note
16444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16445 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16453 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16454 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16459 Note the order of the upper-and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the following
16463 \begin_layout Description
16464 LyX The name of the game, write
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16486 \begin_layout Description
16487 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16509 \begin_layout Description
16510 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16532 \begin_layout Description
16533 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16555 \begin_layout Standard
16556 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16561 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16569 It's an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16570 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16571 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16574 : The actual version is
16575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16582 , the previous one was
16583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16593 \begin_layout Standard
16594 If you don't want to use proper names, e.
16595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16599 \begin_inset space \space{}
16602 in section headings, you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the
16604 This will look in LyX like:
16605 \begin_inset Graphics
16606 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16612 \begin_inset Newline newline
16615 For more about TeX Code, look at section
16616 \begin_inset space ~
16620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16622 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16629 \begin_layout Subsection
16631 \begin_inset Index idx
16634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16643 \begin_layout Standard
16644 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16645 space between two words.
16646 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16656 for units use the menu
16658 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16659 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16661 \begin_inset space ~
16669 arg "space-insert thin"
16675 \begin_layout Standard
16676 Here is an example to show the differences:
16679 \begin_layout Standard
16680 \begin_inset Tabular
16681 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16682 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16683 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16684 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16691 \begin_inset space ~
16695 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16707 space between number and unit
16714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16723 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16735 half space between number and unit
16748 \begin_layout Subsection
16750 \begin_inset Index idx
16753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16754 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16762 \begin_layout Standard
16763 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16765 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16766 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16767 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16768 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16769 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16770 These bits of text became known as
16781 \begin_layout Standard
16782 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16783 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16784 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16785 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16786 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16787 to specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16788 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16791 \begin_layout Standard
16792 There's no way we can go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page,
16793 or how you can tweak that behavior.
16794 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16795 \begin_inset space ~
16799 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16801 key "latexcompanion"
16806 \begin_inset space ~
16810 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16816 ) may have more information.
16817 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16820 \begin_layout Chapter
16821 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16824 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16831 \begin_layout Standard
16832 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16835 \begin_inset space ~
16841 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16844 \begin_layout Section
16846 \begin_inset Index idx
16849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16865 \begin_layout Standard
16866 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16869 \begin_layout Description
16871 \begin_inset space ~
16874 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16875 \begin_inset Newline newline
16879 \begin_inset Note Note
16882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16883 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16891 \begin_layout Description
16892 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16893 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16895 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16896 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16898 \begin_inset space ~
16904 \begin_inset Newline newline
16908 \begin_inset Note Comment
16911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16912 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16920 \begin_layout Description
16922 \begin_inset space ~
16925 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16926 set in the document settings under
16928 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16930 \begin_inset space ~
16936 \begin_inset Newline newline
16940 \begin_inset Newline newline
16944 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16953 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16954 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16959 of a comment that appears in the output.
16965 \begin_inset Newline newline
16969 \begin_inset Newline newline
16972 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
16973 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
16976 \begin_layout Standard
16977 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
16985 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16989 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
16992 \begin_layout Section
16994 \begin_inset Index idx
16997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17006 name "sec:Footnotes"
17013 \begin_layout Standard
17014 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17017 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17020 or the toolbar button
17023 arg "footnote-insert"
17035 \begin_inset Graphics
17036 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17045 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17074 label, the box will
17078 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17079 Clicking on the box label again, will close
17092 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17093 and click on the footnote
17108 \begin_layout Standard
17109 Here is an example footnote:
17117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17126 \begin_layout Standard
17127 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17128 position where the footnote box is placed.
17129 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17130 The footnote number is calculated by LyX.
17131 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
17133 LyX doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other
17134 schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17139 ey are described in the
17142 \begin_inset space ~
17150 \begin_layout Section
17152 \begin_inset Index idx
17155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17164 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17172 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17173 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17175 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17177 \begin_inset space ~
17182 or the toolbar button
17185 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17211 appearing within your text.
17212 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17221 \begin_layout Standard
17222 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17226 \begin_inset Marginal
17229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17230 This is a marginal note.
17238 \begin_layout Standard
17239 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17240 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17241 pages, right on odd pages.
17244 \begin_layout Standard
17245 For further information about marginal notes see section
17248 \begin_inset space ~
17256 \begin_inset space ~
17264 \begin_layout Section
17265 Graphics and Images
17266 \begin_inset Index idx
17269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17276 \begin_inset Index idx
17279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17288 name "sec:Graphics"
17295 \begin_layout Standard
17296 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17297 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17300 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17305 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17309 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17312 \begin_layout Standard
17313 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17318 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17319 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17321 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17322 \begin_inset space ~
17326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17328 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17335 \begin_layout Standard
17340 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17341 of the image in the output.
17342 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17346 \begin_inset space ~
17350 \begin_inset space ~
17359 \begin_inset space ~
17363 \begin_inset space ~
17367 \begin_inset space ~
17372 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17373 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17384 LaTeX and LyX options
17386 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17387 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17391 \begin_inset space ~
17396 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17397 with the image size is printed.
17401 \begin_inset space ~
17405 \begin_inset space ~
17409 \begin_inset space ~
17414 is explained in the
17417 \begin_inset space ~
17429 \begin_layout Standard
17430 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17431 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17433 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17437 \begin_layout Standard
17439 \begin_inset Graphics
17440 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17448 \begin_layout Standard
17449 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17450 the image into a float, see section
17451 \begin_inset space ~
17455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17457 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17464 \begin_layout Subsection
17466 \begin_inset Index idx
17469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17478 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17485 \begin_layout Standard
17486 You can insert images in any known file format.
17487 But as we explained in section
17488 \begin_inset space ~
17492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17494 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17498 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17499 LyX therefore uses the program
17503 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17504 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17505 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17512 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17519 \begin_layout Standard
17520 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17523 \begin_layout Description
17525 \begin_inset space ~
17528 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17529 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17530 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17534 Graphics Interchange Format
17535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17538 (GIF, file extension
17539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17551 \begin_inset Index idx
17554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17586 Portable Network Graphics
17587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17590 (PNG, file extension
17591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17603 \begin_inset Index idx
17606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17642 (JPG, file extension
17643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17667 \begin_inset Index idx
17670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17701 \begin_layout Description
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17706 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17708 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17709 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17710 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17711 \begin_inset Newline newline
17714 Scalable image formats can be
17715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17718 Scalable Vector Graphics
17719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17722 (SVG, file extension
17723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17735 \begin_inset Index idx
17738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17770 Encapsulated PostScript
17771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17774 (EPS, file extension
17775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17787 \begin_inset Index idx
17790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17822 Portable Document Format
17823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17826 (PDF, file extension
17827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17839 \begin_inset Index idx
17842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17857 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17858 result will not be scalable.
17859 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17865 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17873 \begin_layout Standard
17874 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17878 \begin_layout Subsection
17879 Grouping of Image Settings
17880 \begin_inset Index idx
17883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17884 Images ! Settings grouping
17892 \begin_layout Standard
17893 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17895 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17896 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17898 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17899 need to manually change each of them.
17903 \begin_layout Standard
17904 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17907 \begin_inset space ~
17912 field in the Graphics dialog.
17913 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17914 by checking the name of the desired group.
17917 \begin_layout Section
17919 \begin_inset Index idx
17922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17938 \begin_layout Standard
17939 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17942 arg "tabular-insert"
17947 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17951 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
17952 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
17953 from the rest of the table.
17954 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
17955 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
17957 Here is an example table:
17960 \begin_layout Standard
17962 \begin_inset Tabular
17963 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
17964 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17965 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18168 \begin_layout Subsection
18172 \begin_layout Standard
18173 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18176 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18180 This brings up the table dialog.
18181 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18182 cursor is placed currently.
18183 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18184 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18185 done on all of your selection.
18188 \begin_layout Standard
18189 In addition to the table dialog, the
18192 \begin_inset space ~
18197 helps you in setting table properties.
18198 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18201 \begin_layout Standard
18205 \begin_inset space ~
18210 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18211 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18212 current cell respectively.
18213 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18215 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18216 of text, see section
18217 \begin_inset space ~
18221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18223 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18230 \begin_layout Standard
18231 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18232 using the check box
18241 This will merge the cells to
18245 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18246 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18247 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18248 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18249 in the last row without the upper border:
18252 \begin_layout Standard
18254 \begin_inset Tabular
18255 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18256 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18257 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18258 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="0">
18259 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18260 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18271 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18280 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18356 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_layout Standard
18392 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18393 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18394 explained in the chapter
18401 \begin_inset space ~
18407 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18411 degrees counterclockwise.
18412 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18415 \begin_layout Standard
18416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 Most DVI-viewers are
18428 able to display rotations.
18436 \begin_layout Standard
18441 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18446 adds lines for all cell borders.
18449 \begin_layout Subsection
18451 \begin_inset Index idx
18454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 Tables ! Longtables
18461 \begin_inset Index idx
18464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18473 \begin_layout Standard
18474 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18477 \begin_inset space ~
18481 \begin_inset space ~
18490 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18491 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18494 \begin_layout Description
18499 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18500 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18501 except for the first page, if
18504 \begin_inset space ~
18512 \begin_layout Description
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18521 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18522 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18525 \begin_layout Description
18530 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18531 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18532 except for the last page, if
18535 \begin_inset space ~
18543 \begin_layout Description
18547 \begin_inset space ~
18552 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18553 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18556 \begin_layout Description
18557 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18558 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18560 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18564 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18575 \begin_layout Standard
18576 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18577 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18578 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18584 In this context, first means first in this order:
18587 \begin_inset space ~
18599 \begin_inset space ~
18604 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18607 \begin_layout Standard
18609 \begin_inset Tabular
18610 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18611 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18612 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18613 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18614 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18615 <row endfirsthead="true">
18616 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18622 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18627 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18636 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18646 <row endfirsthead="true">
18647 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18658 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18667 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18679 <row endhead="true">
18680 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18691 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18710 <row endhead="true">
18711 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18722 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18731 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 <row endfoot="true">
18744 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18755 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18764 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18795 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <row endlastfoot="true">
20726 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 \begin_layout Subsection
20765 \begin_inset Index idx
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20777 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20784 \begin_layout Standard
20785 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20786 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20787 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20788 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20792 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20795 \begin_layout Standard
20796 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20797 for the column in the table dialog.
20798 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20799 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20803 \begin_layout Standard
20805 \begin_inset Tabular
20806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20807 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20809 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 This is longer now.
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21012 This is longer now.
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 \begin_layout Standard
21044 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21045 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
21051 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21057 Selection with the mouse or with
21061 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21062 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21063 the selection from outside the table.
21066 \begin_layout Section
21068 \begin_inset Index idx
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21087 \begin_layout Subsection
21091 \begin_layout Standard
21092 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21093 have a fixed location.
21095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21102 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21110 \begin_inset space ~
21115 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21116 too many notes on the current page.
21119 \begin_layout Standard
21120 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21121 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21122 and pages without text.
21123 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21124 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21125 Floats are therefore numbered.
21126 Referencing is described in section
21127 \begin_inset space ~
21131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21133 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21140 \begin_layout Standard
21141 To insert a float, use the menu
21143 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21147 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21148 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21150 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21151 \begin_inset Index idx
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21161 paragraph within the float.
21162 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21163 by left-clicking on the box label.
21164 A closed float box looks like this:
21165 \begin_inset Graphics
21166 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21171 – a gray button with a red label.
21174 \begin_layout Standard
21175 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
21176 LaTeX-errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21179 \begin_layout Subsection
21183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21187 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21192 \begin_inset Index idx
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 Floats ! Figure floats
21204 \begin_layout Standard
21206 \begin_inset space ~
21210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21212 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21216 was created using the menu
21218 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21219 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21222 or the toolbar button
21225 arg "float-insert figure"
21229 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21232 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21235 or the toolbar button
21238 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21242 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21243 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
21245 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21247 \begin_inset space ~
21252 or the toolbar button
21255 arg "layout-paragraph"
21261 \begin_layout Standard
21262 \begin_inset Float figure
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 \begin_inset Graphics
21270 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21280 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21285 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21289 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21302 \begin_layout Standard
21303 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21304 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21306 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21309 or the toolbar button
21315 and refer to it using the menu
21317 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21320 or the toolbar button
21323 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21327 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21336 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21346 For more about cross-references, see section
21347 \begin_inset space ~
21351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21353 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21360 \begin_layout Standard
21361 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21362 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21363 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21364 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21365 as described in section
21366 \begin_inset space ~
21370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21372 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21378 \begin_inset space ~
21382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21384 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21388 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21389 You can also set the images one below the other.
21391 \begin_inset space ~
21395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21397 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21404 reference "fig:Platypus"
21408 are the subfigures.
21411 \begin_layout Standard
21412 \begin_inset Float figure
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21422 \begin_inset Float figure
21427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21433 name "fig:Undefinable"
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 \begin_inset Graphics
21447 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21462 \begin_inset Float figure
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21473 name "fig:Platypus"
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 \begin_inset Graphics
21487 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21499 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21511 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21515 Two distorted images.
21528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21530 \begin_inset Index idx
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 Floats ! Table floats
21542 \begin_layout Standard
21543 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21545 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21546 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21549 or the toolbar button
21552 arg "float-insert table"
21556 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21559 \begin_inset space ~
21563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21565 reference "tab:Table-float"
21572 \begin_layout Standard
21573 \begin_inset Float table
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21579 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21584 name "tab:Table-float"
21596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 \begin_inset Tabular
21599 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21600 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21601 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21602 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21730 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21754 \end{array}\right]$
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21796 \begin_layout Subsection
21798 \begin_inset Index idx
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 \begin_layout Standard
21811 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21812 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21813 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21815 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21823 \begin_inset space ~
21831 \begin_layout Section
21833 \begin_inset Index idx
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21845 name "sec:Minipages"
21852 \begin_layout Standard
21853 LaTeX provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page,
21855 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21856 \begin_inset space \space{}
21863 \begin_layout Standard
21864 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21866 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21870 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21871 and its alignment within the page.
21874 \begin_layout Standard
21876 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21886 height_special "totalheight"
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21892 This is a minipage.
21893 The text is set in an italic style.
21896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
21900 another formatting.
21908 \begin_layout Standard
21909 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21912 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
21916 as described in section
21917 \begin_inset space ~
21921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21923 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
21928 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21934 \begin_layout Standard
21935 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21945 height_special "totalheight"
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21950 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21956 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21960 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21970 height_special "totalheight"
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21975 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21983 \begin_layout Standard
21984 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21990 \begin_layout Standard
21991 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
21993 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22000 \begin_inset space ~
22008 \begin_layout Chapter
22009 Mathematical Formulas
22010 \begin_inset Index idx
22013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 \begin_inset Index idx
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22054 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22061 \begin_layout Standard
22062 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22067 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22070 \begin_layout Section
22072 \begin_inset Index idx
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22084 \begin_layout Standard
22085 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22092 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22094 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22095 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22096 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22098 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22104 \begin_layout Standard
22105 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22109 \begin_inset space ~
22114 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22117 \begin_layout Standard
22118 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22119 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22122 \begin_layout Standard
22123 This is a line with an inline formula
22124 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22130 \begin_layout Standard
22131 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22132 paragraph, like this one:
22133 \begin_inset Formula
22140 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22143 \begin_layout Standard
22144 LyX supports also many LaTeX math commands.
22146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22150 \begin_inset space \space{}
22154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22167 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22168 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22172 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22175 \begin_inset space ~
22183 \begin_layout Subsection
22184 Navigating in Formulas
22185 \begin_inset Index idx
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 \begin_layout Standard
22198 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22199 achieved with the arrow keys.
22200 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22201 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22206 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22207 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22211 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22215 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22218 \end{array}\right]$
22226 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22231 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22232 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22235 \begin_layout Standard
22240 , printed in this document as
22241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22262 \begin_inset Note Note
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22266 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
22267 the space character (visible space).
22272 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22273 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22274 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22279 For example, if you want
22280 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 , since in the latter case only the
22337 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22342 will be under the square root sign:
22343 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22349 \begin_layout Standard
22350 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22352 \begin_inset Formula
22354 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22363 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22364 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22367 \begin_layout Subsection
22371 \begin_layout Standard
22372 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22373 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22377 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22378 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22379 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22380 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22381 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22384 \begin_layout Subsection
22385 Exponents and Subscripts
22386 \begin_inset Index idx
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 \begin_inset Index idx
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 \begin_layout Standard
22409 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22412 arg "math-superscript"
22418 arg "math-subscript"
22421 ), but the much easier way is to use a command.
22423 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22426 , type in a formula
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22454 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22458 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22488 , you have to use an extra
22492 to separate the hat and the character.
22494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22498 \begin_inset space \space{}
22502 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 Subscripts are similar: To get
22524 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 \begin_layout Subsection
22549 \begin_inset Index idx
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 \begin_layout Standard
22562 Create a fraction with either the command
22571 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22577 \begin_inset space ~
22583 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22584 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22585 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22590 To move back up, press
22595 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22596 \begin_inset Formula
22598 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22601 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22609 \begin_layout Subsection
22611 \begin_inset Index idx
22614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 \begin_layout Standard
22624 Roots can be created using the
22627 \begin_inset space ~
22635 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22641 arg "math-insert \\root"
22663 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22669 produces always a square root.
22672 \begin_layout Subsection
22673 Operators with Limits
22674 \begin_inset Index idx
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22684 \begin_inset Index idx
22687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22696 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22703 \begin_layout Standard
22705 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22709 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22712 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22713 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22714 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22715 The sum operator will automatically place its
22716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22723 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and on the side in inline
22726 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22730 \begin_inset Formula
22732 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22737 Integral signs, however, will place the limits on the side in both formula
22741 \begin_layout Standard
22742 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22744 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22745 behind the operator and hitting
22753 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22754 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22756 \begin_inset space ~
22760 \begin_inset space ~
22768 \begin_layout Standard
22769 Certain other mathematical expressions have this
22770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22777 feature as addition, such as
22778 \begin_inset Index idx
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 \begin_inset Formula
22790 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22795 which will place the
22796 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22808 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22809 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22815 \begin_layout Standard
22816 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22823 Have a look at section
22824 \begin_inset space ~
22828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22830 reference "sub:Functions"
22834 for an explanation of function macros.
22837 \begin_layout Subsection
22839 \begin_inset Index idx
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 \begin_layout Standard
22852 Most math symbols can be found in the
22855 \begin_inset space ~
22860 under one of several categories; including
22877 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22881 \begin_layout Standard
22882 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22883 you don't have to use the
22886 \begin_inset space ~
22891 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22892 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22895 \begin_layout Subsection
22897 \begin_inset Index idx
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 \begin_layout Standard
22910 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22915 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
22921 \begin_inset space ~
22931 arg "math-insert \\space"
22937 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22938 For example, the sequence
22943 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
22947 \begin_inset Graphics
22948 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22953 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22954 the space marker and hit space again several times.
22955 With every space hit the size will be changed.
22956 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
22958 Here are two examples:
22961 \begin_layout Standard
22971 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22977 \begin_layout Standard
22987 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
22993 \begin_layout Subsection
22995 \begin_inset Index idx
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23007 name "sub:Functions"
23014 \begin_layout Standard
23018 \begin_inset space ~
23023 contains under the button
23028 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23033 a number of function macros, such as
23034 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23038 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23046 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23053 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23054 avoid confusions, because
23055 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23059 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23065 \begin_layout Standard
23066 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23068 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23072 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23078 \begin_layout Standard
23079 For some mathematical objects, like the limes, the macro changes where subscript
23080 s are placed, as described in section
23081 \begin_inset space ~
23085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23087 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23094 \begin_layout Subsection
23096 \begin_inset Index idx
23099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23109 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23111 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23112 You can also use LaTeX commands to e.
23113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23117 \begin_inset space \space{}
23121 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23124 even if your keyboard doesn't have hat-accents enabled.
23125 Our example is entered by typing
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 \begin_inset space ~
23150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23152 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23156 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23159 \begin_layout Standard
23160 \begin_inset Float table
23165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23171 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23175 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23185 \begin_inset Tabular
23186 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23187 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23598 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23652 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23772 \begin_layout Standard
23773 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23776 \begin_inset space ~
23784 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23787 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23791 \begin_layout Section
23792 Brackets and Delimiters
23793 \begin_inset Index idx
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 \begin_inset Index idx
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23815 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23822 \begin_layout Standard
23823 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23824 For some purposes, using just the keys
23829 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23830 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23831 toolbar delimiter icon
23834 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23838 For example, that is how you would construct the brackets around a matrix:
23839 \begin_inset Formula
23841 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23849 and to make it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23850 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23854 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23857 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23863 \begin_inset Formula
23865 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23873 \begin_layout Standard
23874 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23875 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23879 \begin_layout Standard
23880 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23881 left side and right side.
23882 If you use the option
23885 \begin_inset space ~
23890 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23891 The selection will be shown below the button field.
23892 If you want one side to not have a bracket, use the blank button.
23893 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23896 \begin_layout Standard
23897 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
23898 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to
23899 go inside the brackets.
23900 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23905 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
23906 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23907 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23908 For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select
23909 the structure and enter
23912 arg "math-delim ( )"
23918 \begin_layout Section
23919 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23920 \begin_inset Index idx
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 \begin_inset Index idx
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 \begin_inset Index idx
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23952 \begin_layout Standard
23953 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
23956 \begin_inset space ~
23966 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
23972 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23973 Here is an example:
23974 \begin_inset Formula
23976 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23985 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23986 \begin_inset space ~
23990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23992 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23997 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23998 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23999 This alignment is set in the box
24004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24052 for every column as default.
24053 For example, the sequence
24054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24065 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24066 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24067 corresponds to the relevant column.
24068 The result will look like this:
24069 \begin_inset Formula
24072 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24073 column & has & has\, right\\
24074 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24083 \begin_layout Standard
24084 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by hitting
24087 arg "newline-insert newline"
24090 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24091 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24093 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24096 or the math toolbar.
24099 \begin_layout Standard
24100 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24101 It can be created with the menu
24103 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24104 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24106 \begin_inset space ~
24118 Here is an example:
24119 \begin_inset Formula
24133 \begin_layout Standard
24134 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24137 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24140 arg "newline-insert newline"
24144 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24149 arg "newline-insert newline"
24152 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24160 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24161 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24162 A new row is created by every further hit of
24165 arg "newline-insert newline"
24169 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24170 Here is an example:
24171 \begin_inset Formula
24173 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24174 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24179 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24180 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24181 \begin_inset Formula
24183 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24191 \begin_layout Standard
24192 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24199 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24200 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24203 reference "eq:asquared"
24208 The other types are described in section
24209 \begin_inset space ~
24213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24215 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24222 \begin_layout Section
24223 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24224 \begin_inset Index idx
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24228 Math ! Formula numbering
24234 \begin_inset Index idx
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 Math ! Referencing formulas
24244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24246 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24253 \begin_layout Standard
24254 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24256 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24257 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24259 \begin_inset space ~
24267 arg "math-number-toggle"
24271 The formula number appears in LyX as
24272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24279 within parentheses.
24281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24288 denotes that the number will be calculated automatically when the output
24290 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24291 the document class.
24292 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24293 separated by a dot:
24294 \begin_inset Formula
24304 arg "math-number-toggle"
24307 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24308 You can only number displayed formulas.
24311 \begin_layout Standard
24312 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24314 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24315 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24317 \begin_inset space ~
24321 \begin_inset space ~
24325 \begin_inset space ~
24333 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24336 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24337 \begin_inset Formula
24340 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24346 To number all lines use the shortcut
24349 arg "math-number-toggle"
24355 \begin_layout Standard
24356 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24359 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24360 A label is inserted with the menu
24362 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24365 when the cursor is in the formula.
24366 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24367 It is recommended to use the proposed
24368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24379 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24380 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24381 We inserted in the following example the label
24382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24389 in the second line:
24390 \begin_inset Formula
24392 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24393 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24398 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24399 Therefore the label is shown in LyX at the place of the formula number
24401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24409 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24411 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24413 \begin_inset space ~
24419 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24420 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24421 as the formula number:
24424 \begin_layout Standard
24425 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24428 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24435 \begin_layout Standard
24436 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24437 \begin_inset space ~
24441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24443 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24448 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24456 \begin_layout Section
24457 User defined math macros
24458 \begin_inset Index idx
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 \begin_layout Standard
24471 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24472 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24473 Math macros are explained in section
24476 \begin_inset space ~
24488 \begin_layout Section
24492 \begin_layout Subsection
24494 \begin_inset Index idx
24497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 \begin_layout Standard
24507 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24508 To set a font in a formula, use the
24511 \begin_inset space ~
24521 arg "math-insert \\font"
24526 , or enter its command, listed in table
24527 \begin_inset space ~
24531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24533 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24540 \begin_layout Standard
24541 \begin_inset Float table
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24547 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24552 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24556 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 \begin_inset Tabular
24567 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24568 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24629 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24689 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24743 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24777 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24838 \begin_layout Standard
24839 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24847 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24863 \begin_layout Standard
24864 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24865 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24870 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24871 space when you need a space in the box.
24872 Here is an example where
24873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24884 denotes the set of numbers:
24885 \begin_inset Formula
24887 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24895 \begin_layout Standard
24896 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24902 \begin_inset space \space{}
24914 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24918 \begin_inset Newline newline
24921 So it is better not to use this feature.
24924 \begin_layout Standard
24925 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24926 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24930 \begin_inset Newline newline
24933 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24939 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24940 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24946 \begin_layout Standard
24953 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24956 \begin_layout Standard
24957 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24959 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24960 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24962 \begin_inset space ~
24970 \begin_layout Subsection
24972 \begin_inset Index idx
24975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24984 \begin_layout Standard
24985 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24987 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24991 \begin_inset space ~
24995 \begin_inset space ~
25003 \begin_inset space ~
25013 arg "math-insert \\font"
25025 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25026 You can use spaces and accents in math text like in normal text.
25027 Here is an example:
25028 \begin_inset Formula
25031 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25032 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25041 \begin_layout Subsection
25043 \begin_inset Index idx
25046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 \begin_layout Standard
25056 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25057 automatically chosen in most situations.
25075 For most characters,
25083 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25084 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25089 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25090 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25092 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25097 arg "math-insert \\style"
25103 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25104 For example, you can set
25105 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25108 , which is normally in
25117 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25121 The four styles are used in the following example:
25124 \begin_layout Standard
25125 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25129 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25133 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25137 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25143 \begin_layout Standard
25144 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25145 is set in a particular size with the menu
25147 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25149 \begin_inset space ~
25154 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25155 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25156 will be adjusted to correspond.
25157 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25172 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25178 \begin_layout Section
25182 \begin_layout Standard
25183 As of LyX 1.6, support for theorem-like environments has been moved out of
25184 the document classes and into layout modules.
25185 \begin_inset Index idx
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 As a result, theorem-like environments can now easily be used with classes
25195 other than the AMS classes.
25197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25199 reference "sub:Modules"
25203 for more on layout modules.
25206 \begin_layout Section
25208 \begin_inset Index idx
25211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 \begin_inset Index idx
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 \begin_layout Standard
25231 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25232 (AMS) that are in common use.
25235 \begin_layout Subsection
25236 Enabling AMS-Support
25239 \begin_layout Standard
25240 Selecting the checkbox
25243 \begin_inset space ~
25247 \begin_inset space ~
25251 \begin_inset space ~
25258 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25262 \begin_inset Index idx
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 Document ! Settings
25274 \begin_inset space ~
25279 will include the AMS-packages in the document and make the facilities available.
25280 AMS is needed for many math-constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25281 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25284 \begin_layout Subsection
25286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25288 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25293 \begin_inset Index idx
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25305 \begin_layout Standard
25306 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25307 LyX allows you to choose between
25328 We refer to the AMS-documentation for an explanation of these formula types.
25331 \begin_layout Chapter
25335 \begin_layout Section
25337 \begin_inset Index idx
25340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25349 name "sec:Cross-References"
25356 \begin_layout Standard
25357 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25358 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25360 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25361 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25362 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25365 \begin_layout Enumerate
25369 \begin_layout Enumerate
25370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25372 name "enu:Second-item"
25379 \begin_layout Enumerate
25383 \begin_layout Standard
25384 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25386 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25389 or by pressing the toolbar button
25396 A gray label box like this:
25397 \begin_inset Graphics
25398 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25403 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25404 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25439 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted, e.
25440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25444 \begin_inset space \space{}
25447 if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix will
25449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25463 \begin_layout Standard
25464 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25466 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25469 or the toolbar button
25472 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25476 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25477 \begin_inset Graphics
25478 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25483 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25485 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25498 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25502 \begin_layout Standard
25505 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25508 , you can right-click on a label and use in the appearing context menu
25513 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25514 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25516 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25528 \begin_layout Standard
25529 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25530 \begin_inset space ~
25534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25536 reference "enu:Second-item"
25543 \begin_layout Standard
25544 It is recommended to use a protected space
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25549 described in section
25550 \begin_inset space ~
25554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25556 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25565 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25566 line breaks between them.
25569 \begin_layout Standard
25570 There are six formats of cross-references:
25573 \begin_layout Description
25574 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25577 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25584 \begin_layout Description
25585 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25586 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25598 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25605 \begin_layout Description
25606 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25607 \begin_inset space ~
25611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25612 LatexCommand pageref
25613 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25620 \begin_layout Description
25622 \begin_inset space ~
25626 \begin_inset space ~
25629 <page>: prints the text "on page" and the page number:
25630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25631 LatexCommand vpageref
25632 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25639 \begin_layout Description
25641 \begin_inset space ~
25645 \begin_inset space ~
25649 \begin_inset space ~
25652 <page>: prints the number, the text "on page", and the page number:
25653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25655 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25662 \begin_layout Description
25664 \begin_inset space ~
25667 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25668 \begin_inset Newline newline
25672 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25680 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25689 \begin_inset Index idx
25692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25693 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25699 \begin_inset Index idx
25702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25703 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25714 \begin_inset Newline newline
25717 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25720 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25724 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25725 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25733 is the default and preferred because
25737 supports only English documents.
25738 The format is specified by using the command
25750 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25751 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25764 ) can be done with this command
25765 \begin_inset Newline newline
25772 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25777 \begin_inset Newline newline
25780 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25784 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25791 \begin_layout Description
25793 \begin_inset space ~
25796 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25798 LatexCommand nameref
25799 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25806 \begin_layout Standard
25811 will not print the page number if the label is on the previous, the same,
25814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25818 \begin_inset space \space{}
25822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25836 <reference> on page <page>
25838 will not print anything about the page if the label is on the same page.
25841 \begin_layout Standard
25842 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25843 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25844 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25848 of the cross-reference window, that appear when you click on the cross-referenc
25852 \begin_layout Standard
25853 You can only use the style
25857 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25861 is always possible.
25864 \begin_layout Standard
25865 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25866 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25868 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25869 \begin_inset space ~
25873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25875 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25882 \begin_layout Standard
25883 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25887 \begin_inset space ~
25891 \begin_inset space ~
25896 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25897 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25900 \begin_inset space ~
25905 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25906 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25909 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25915 \begin_layout Standard
25916 You can change labels at any time.
25917 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25918 do not need to think about this.
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25922 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see two question
25923 marks in the output instead of the reference.
25926 \begin_layout Standard
25927 References are described in detail in sec.
25928 \begin_inset space ~
25932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25942 \begin_inset space ~
25950 \begin_layout Section
25951 Table of Contents and other Listings
25952 \begin_inset Index idx
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25962 \begin_inset Index idx
25965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25981 \begin_layout Subsection
25983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25985 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
25992 \begin_layout Standard
25993 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25995 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25996 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25998 \begin_inset space ~
26002 \begin_inset space ~
26008 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26009 If you click on it, the
26013 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26014 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26015 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26017 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26020 that is described in sec.
26021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26027 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26034 \begin_layout Standard
26035 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26036 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26038 \begin_inset space ~
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26044 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26048 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26050 \begin_inset space ~
26054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26056 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26060 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26062 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26065 \begin_layout Subsection
26066 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26069 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26076 \begin_layout Standard
26077 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26078 You can insert them via the
26080 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26082 \begin_inset space ~
26086 \begin_inset space ~
26092 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26095 \begin_layout Section
26096 URLs and Hyperlinks
26097 \begin_inset Index idx
26100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26107 \begin_inset Index idx
26110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26119 \begin_layout Subsection
26121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26130 \begin_layout Standard
26131 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26133 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26139 \begin_layout Standard
26140 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26141 \begin_inset Flex URL
26144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26154 \begin_layout Standard
26155 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26161 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26165 \begin_layout Standard
26166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26174 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26182 \begin_layout Subsection
26184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26186 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26193 \begin_layout Standard
26194 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26196 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26199 or with the toolbar button
26206 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26215 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26216 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26217 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26219 name "LyX's homepage"
26220 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26224 , an Email address like this:
26225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26227 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26228 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26233 , or a link to a file.
26236 \begin_layout Standard
26237 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26250 to the link target.
26253 \begin_layout Standard
26254 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26255 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26256 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26257 the text style dialog.
26258 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26264 name "LyX's homepage"
26265 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26272 \begin_layout Standard
26273 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26277 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26279 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26280 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26284 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26286 \begin_inset Newline newline
26294 \begin_inset Newline newline
26301 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26304 \begin_layout Section
26306 \begin_inset Index idx
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26318 name "sec:Appendices"
26325 \begin_layout Standard
26326 Appendices are created with the menu
26328 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26330 \begin_inset space ~
26334 \begin_inset space ~
26340 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26341 as the appendix region.
26342 The region is marked with a red borderline.
26345 \begin_layout Standard
26346 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix region is treated as an appendix,
26347 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26348 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26349 and the subsection number.
26350 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26354 \begin_layout Standard
26356 \begin_inset space ~
26360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26362 reference "chap:Credits"
26367 \begin_inset space ~
26371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26373 reference "sub:Export"
26380 \begin_layout Section
26382 \begin_inset Index idx
26385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26394 name "sec:Bibliography"
26401 \begin_layout Standard
26402 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26403 You can include a bibliography database,
26407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26408 Known under the name
26409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26421 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26422 manually, using the paragraph environment
26426 , which was described in section
26427 \begin_inset space ~
26431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26433 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26438 If you want anything other than numerical citations that are used in this
26439 document, like author-year citations, then you must
26443 use a bibliography database.
26446 \begin_layout Subsection
26447 The Bibliography Environment
26450 \begin_layout Standard
26455 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26457 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26466 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26468 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26477 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26480 \begin_layout Standard
26481 You can refer to the key of a bibliography entry using the menu
26483 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26486 or the toolbar button
26489 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26493 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26494 in which you can select one or more keys in the available key list.
26495 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key.
26496 When you click on the box, the citation window appears and you can change
26500 \begin_layout Standard
26501 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26502 entry with surrounding brackets.
26507 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26508 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26520 \begin_layout Standard
26523 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26528 key "latexcompanion"
26535 \begin_layout Standard
26536 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26546 \begin_layout Subsection
26547 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26548 \begin_inset Index idx
26551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26552 Bibliography ! Databases
26558 \begin_inset Index idx
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26562 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26570 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26577 \begin_layout Standard
26578 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26584 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26586 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26587 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26592 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26594 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26595 your working field in a database.
26596 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26597 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26598 list for that document.
26599 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26603 \begin_layout Standard
26604 The database is a text file with the file extension
26605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26616 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26617 The format is explained in
26618 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26624 and in LaTeX books (
26625 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26627 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26632 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26633 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26634 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26635 \begin_inset Flex URL
26638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26640 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26648 \begin_layout Standard
26649 To use a database, use the menu
26651 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26656 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26669 \begin_inset space ~
26675 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26676 In this window you can load one or more databases and a style file.
26679 Add bibliography to TOC
26681 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26686 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26687 in the document or just the cited references.
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26703 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26704 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26705 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26707 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26713 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26714 \begin_inset Newline newline
26718 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26720 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26732 \begin_layout Standard
26733 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26736 \begin_layout Standard
26737 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26738 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the processor
26739 either in the document settings under
26743 or in LyX's preferences under
26745 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26760 The following variants are possible:
26763 \begin_layout Description
26764 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, does not work with
26765 other bibliography packages (like e.
26766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26770 \begin_inset space ~
26777 ), only with the package
26781 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26785 \begin_layout Description
26786 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26787 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26788 with all bibliography packages, except of
26793 \begin_layout Description
26794 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in a 8-bit encoding,
26799 , works with all bibliography packages
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26803 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26805 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended to read the manual of
26811 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26820 \begin_layout Standard
26821 When you select the option
26823 Sectioned bibliography
26827 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26830 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26831 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26833 Customizing Bibliographies
26841 Additional Features
26846 \begin_layout Standard
26847 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26848 the two methods of creating them.
26849 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26850 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26851 We used the style file
26855 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26858 \begin_layout Subsection
26859 Bibliography layout
26860 \begin_inset Index idx
26863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26864 Bibliography ! Layout
26872 \begin_layout Standard
26873 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26874 For this feature you need to enable the option
26880 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26884 \begin_inset Index idx
26887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26888 Document ! Settings
26898 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26899 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26900 in the previous section.
26903 \begin_layout Standard
26904 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26905 the citation reference window.
26906 Here is an example where the text
26907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26911 \begin_inset space ~
26915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26918 appears after the reference:
26921 \begin_layout Standard
26923 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26926 key "latexcompanion"
26933 \begin_layout Section
26935 \begin_inset Index idx
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26954 \begin_layout Standard
26955 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26957 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26959 \begin_inset space ~
26964 or the toolbar button
26971 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26972 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26973 by LyX as the index entry.
26976 \begin_layout Standard
26977 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26979 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26981 \begin_inset space ~
26985 \begin_inset space ~
26988 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26990 \begin_inset space ~
26996 A light blue box labeled
26997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27008 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27009 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27012 \begin_layout Standard
27013 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27014 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27016 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27018 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27025 \begin_layout Subsection
27026 Grouping Index Entries
27027 \begin_inset Index idx
27030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27039 \begin_layout Standard
27040 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27042 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27043 lists under the entry
27044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27052 First we create the entry
27053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27061 \begin_inset space ~
27065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27067 reference "sub:Lists"
27072 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27073 \begin_inset space ~
27077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27079 reference "sec:Itemize"
27083 , we insert the command
27086 \begin_layout Standard
27092 \begin_layout Standard
27096 \begin_layout Standard
27102 \begin_layout Standard
27103 for the enumerated list in section
27104 \begin_inset space ~
27108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27110 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27117 \begin_layout Standard
27118 The exclamation mark
27119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27126 marks the grouping levels.
27127 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27128 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27129 If we don't have an index entry for
27130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27137 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27140 \begin_layout Subsection
27142 \begin_inset Index idx
27145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27146 Index ! Page ranges
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27157 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27163 \begin_inset space \space{}
27166 if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an index entry
27168 \begin_inset space ~
27172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27174 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27181 \begin_layout Standard
27184 Paragraph environments|(
27187 \begin_layout Standard
27188 and another entry at the end of section
27189 \begin_inset space ~
27193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27195 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27202 \begin_layout Standard
27205 Paragraph environments|)
27208 \begin_layout Standard
27210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27233 respectively start and end the index range.
27234 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27235 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27236 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27237 An example is the index entry
27238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27241 Document ! Settings
27242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27248 \begin_layout Subsection
27250 \begin_inset Index idx
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27254 Index ! Cross referencing
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27264 We referred for example in the index entry
27265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27273 \begin_inset space ~
27277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27279 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27283 ) to the index entry
27284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27291 in the same section using the entry
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27297 GIF|see{Image formats}
27300 \begin_layout Standard
27301 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27302 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27303 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27306 \begin_layout Subsection
27308 \begin_inset Index idx
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27312 Index ! Entry order
27320 \begin_layout Standard
27321 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27322 follow the rules for the index order.
27323 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27330 \begin_inset space ~
27334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27336 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27345 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27346 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27371 \begin_inset Index idx
27374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27375 Dummy entries ! maïs
27381 \begin_inset Index idx
27384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27385 Dummy entries ! maître
27391 \begin_inset Index idx
27394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27395 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27400 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27401 maïs, maison, maître.
27402 To achieve this, we use the command
27405 \begin_layout Standard
27408 previous entry@current entry
27411 \begin_layout Standard
27412 In our case we want to have
27413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27428 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27431 \begin_layout Standard
27437 \begin_layout Standard
27438 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27439 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27440 See the next subsection for an example.
27443 \begin_layout Standard
27444 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27450 \begin_layout Standard
27451 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27456 to generate the index (see sec.
27457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27463 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27472 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27480 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27484 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27485 index commands start with
27486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27498 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27503 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27506 \begin_layout Standard
27518 \begin_layout Standard
27530 \begin_layout Subsection
27532 \begin_inset Index idx
27535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27536 Index ! Entry layout
27544 \begin_layout Standard
27545 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27546 \begin_inset Index idx
27549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27552 This is an italic dummy entry
27557 You can also format the page number using the character
27558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27565 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27566 We can write for example
27569 \begin_layout Standard
27572 italic page number:|textit
27575 \begin_layout Standard
27576 to get the page number in italic.
27577 \begin_inset Index idx
27580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27581 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27586 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27604 \begin_inset space ~
27610 Have a look at section
27611 \begin_inset space ~
27615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27617 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27621 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27624 \begin_layout Standard
27625 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27633 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27637 to generate the index, see sec.
27638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27644 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27653 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27658 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27659 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27662 key "latexcompanion"
27674 \begin_layout Standard
27675 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27677 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27678 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27679 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27680 If so, put the following in the preamble
27683 \begin_layout Standard
27695 \begin_layout Standard
27699 \begin_layout Standard
27705 \begin_layout Standard
27706 in the index entry.
27707 \begin_inset Index idx
27710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27711 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27716 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27717 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27718 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27728 \begin_inset space \space{}
27731 we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get a bold font
27732 for all index entries.
27733 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27745 documentation for details,
27746 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27748 key "makeindex,xindy"
27755 \begin_layout Subsection
27757 \begin_inset Index idx
27760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27769 name "sub:Index-Program"
27776 \begin_layout Standard
27777 If the index entry program
27781 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27785 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27794 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27795 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27796 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27797 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27798 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27808 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27809 dialog, see section
27810 \begin_inset space ~
27814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27816 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27821 The available options are listed and explained in
27822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27824 key "makeindex,xindy"
27829 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27833 \begin_layout Standard
27834 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27835 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27838 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27839 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27843 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27844 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27847 \begin_layout Subsection
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27853 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27861 next to the standard index.
27862 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27863 that add this feature.
27869 \begin_inset Index idx
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27873 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27878 package to generate multiple indexes.
27879 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27884 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27892 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27893 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27894 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27902 \begin_layout Standard
27903 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27905 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27906 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27909 and select the option
27911 Use multiple Indexes
27918 already contains the standard index
27919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27927 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27928 also appear as a heading) to the
27932 input field and press the
27937 The new index now also appears in the list.
27938 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
27942 \begin_layout Standard
27943 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27946 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27948 \begin_inset space ~
27952 \begin_inset space ~
27961 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27962 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27963 are additional features:
27966 \begin_layout Itemize
27967 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27968 on the entries' label will open a dialog where you can do that.
27971 \begin_layout Itemize
27972 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27973 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
27974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27982 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27987 g., if you use a book class, where the standard index heading is defined
27988 as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested
27989 to the non-subindexes.
27992 \begin_layout Section
27993 Nomenclature / Glossary
27994 \begin_inset Index idx
27997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28004 \begin_inset Index idx
28007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28038 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28045 \begin_layout Standard
28046 Sometimes you need to compile a list of symbols that are mentioned in your
28047 document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or
28051 \begin_layout Standard
28052 To be able to create nomenclatures, you need the LaTeX package
28057 \begin_inset Index idx
28060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28061 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28067 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28068 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28074 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28077 \begin_layout Standard
28078 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28079 and then use the menu
28081 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28087 \begin_inset space ~
28092 or the toolbar button
28095 arg "nomencl-insert"
28100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28111 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28114 \begin_layout Standard
28115 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28116 The first is the symbol that you want to refer to.
28117 The second is the description of the symbol.
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28121 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28137 \begin_layout Subsection
28138 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28139 \begin_inset Index idx
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28143 Nomenclature ! Layout
28151 \begin_layout Standard
28152 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28156 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28162 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28170 \begin_inset Newline newline
28178 \begin_inset Newline newline
28184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28191 character starts/ends the formula.
28192 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28204 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28214 \begin_layout Standard
28215 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28216 \begin_inset space ~
28220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28222 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28229 \begin_layout Standard
28233 \begin_inset space ~
28238 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28239 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28244 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28251 in this document is:
28252 \begin_inset Newline newline
28257 dummy entry for the character
28262 \begin_inset Newline newline
28274 \begin_inset space ~
28284 font use the command
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 If the characters |
28315 \begin_inset space \space{}
28319 \begin_inset space \space{}
28323 \begin_inset space \space{}
28327 \begin_inset space \space{}
28331 \begin_inset space \space{}
28334 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28335 a quote character in front of them.
28336 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28337 LatexCommand nomenclature
28338 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28339 description "The quote sign is output by writing ' \"\"\"\" '"
28346 \begin_layout Subsection
28347 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28348 \begin_inset Index idx
28351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28352 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28360 \begin_layout Standard
28361 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28362 the symbol definition.
28363 This leads to undesired results when you for example have symbols in formulas.
28364 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28367 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28368 LatexCommand nomenclature
28370 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28377 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28381 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28382 LatexCommand nomenclature
28385 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28390 They will be sorted by
28391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28417 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28420 will be sorted before the
28424 since the character
28425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28432 is considered in sorting.
28435 \begin_layout Standard
28436 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28439 \begin_inset space ~
28444 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28445 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28447 For the example given, you can insert
28451 in this field for the
28452 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28459 will be located before
28460 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28466 \begin_layout Standard
28467 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28481 \begin_layout Subsection
28482 Nomenclature Options
28483 \begin_inset Index idx
28486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28487 Nomenclature ! Options
28495 \begin_layout Standard
28500 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28501 Here are some of its options, for more have a look at its documentation:
28504 \begin_layout Description
28505 refeq Appends the phrase
28506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28521 to every nomenclature entry, where
28527 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28530 \begin_layout Description
28531 refpage Appends the phrase
28532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28547 to every nomenclature entry, where
28553 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28556 \begin_layout Description
28557 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28560 \begin_layout Standard
28561 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28562 class options list in the
28564 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28568 In this document the options
28575 \begin_layout Standard
28576 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28582 \begin_layout Standard
28583 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28584 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28589 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28592 \begin_layout Description
28602 \begin_layout Description
28605 nomrefpage Like the
28612 \begin_layout Description
28615 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28624 \begin_layout Description
28628 \begin_inset space ~
28634 \begin_inset space ~
28639 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28642 \begin_layout Standard
28644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28651 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28652 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28655 \begin_layout Standard
28663 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28666 \begin_inset Newline newline
28673 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28678 \begin_inset Newline newline
28682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28697 by their translation.
28700 \begin_layout Subsection
28701 Printing the Nomenclature
28702 \begin_inset Index idx
28705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28706 Nomenclature ! Printing
28714 \begin_layout Standard
28715 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28717 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28719 \begin_inset space ~
28723 \begin_inset space ~
28726 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28742 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28743 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28744 You can choose between these settings:
28747 \begin_layout Description
28748 Default a space of 1
28749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28755 \begin_layout Description
28757 \begin_inset space ~
28761 \begin_inset space ~
28764 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28767 \begin_layout Description
28768 Custom custom space
28771 \begin_layout Standard
28772 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28781 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28789 For example, in order to change the name to
28793 , add the following line to the preamble:
28796 \begin_layout Standard
28804 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28807 \begin_layout Subsection
28808 Nomenclature Program
28809 \begin_inset Index idx
28812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28813 Nomenclature ! Program
28819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28821 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28828 \begin_layout Standard
28829 LyX uses the program
28833 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28834 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28839 by adding options, see section
28840 \begin_inset space ~
28844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28846 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28851 The available options are listed and explained in
28852 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28854 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28861 \begin_layout Section
28863 \begin_inset Index idx
28866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28873 \begin_inset Index idx
28876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28877 Document ! Branches
28883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28885 name "sec:Branches"
28892 \begin_layout Standard
28893 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28894 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28895 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28896 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28899 \begin_layout Standard
28900 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28901 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28902 To create a branch, either select the menu
28904 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28905 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28908 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28910 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28917 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28918 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28919 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28920 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28921 (see below for an example).
28922 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28923 to the name of the other) and to add
28924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28936 \begin_inset space ~
28939 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28940 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28943 \begin_layout Standard
28944 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28945 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28947 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28950 where you can choose a branch.
28951 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28955 \begin_layout Standard
28956 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28957 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28960 \begin_layout Standard
28961 \begin_inset Branch Question
28964 \begin_layout Standard
28965 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28974 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28977 \begin_layout Standard
28978 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28986 \begin_layout Standard
28993 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28994 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28997 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28998 Consider for example a file
28999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29006 which has the above branches.
29008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29015 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29039 branch were inactive,
29040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29055 branch was active, likewise
29056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29071 branch was active, and
29072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29075 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29079 if both branches were active.
29080 This helps you to easily export different versions of your document without
29084 \begin_layout Standard
29085 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29091 \begin_layout Standard
29092 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29093 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29095 For example you can define for the question branch
29099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29100 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29101 \begin_inset space ~
29105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29107 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29119 \begin_layout Standard
29129 \begin_layout Standard
29139 \begin_layout Standard
29140 and for the answer branch
29143 \begin_layout Standard
29153 \begin_layout Standard
29163 \begin_layout Standard
29164 \begin_inset Branch Question
29167 \begin_layout Standard
29171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29199 \begin_layout Standard
29200 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29203 \begin_layout Standard
29207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29235 \begin_layout Standard
29236 Now it is possible to use the commands
29240 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29247 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29250 to obtain conditional output.
29251 Here is an example formula where only the
29258 \begin_inset Formula
29260 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29275 \change_inserted 5863208 1334492666
29279 \begin_layout Standard
29281 \change_inserted 5863208 1334493356
29282 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29284 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29285 For this advanced usage, please study Customization manual (in particular
29287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29290 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29299 \begin_layout Section
29301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29303 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29308 \begin_inset Index idx
29311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29320 \begin_layout Standard
29325 dialog allows you in the
29329 to set up special options for the PDF output of your document.
29330 All options there are provided by the LaTeX-package
29335 \begin_inset Index idx
29338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29339 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29347 \begin_layout Standard
29352 will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29353 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29354 table of contents entry or on a reference and he is shown the referenced
29356 You can specify in the dialog tab
29360 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29362 The backreferences will appear in the bibliography behind the different
29363 entries, showing the number of the section, slide, or page where the entry
29367 \begin_layout Standard
29372 you can set if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your
29373 document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29374 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29376 With the open bookmarks level you can specify what sectioning level should
29377 be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
29379 \begin_inset space ~
29382 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29383 \begin_inset space ~
29386 1 will only display the sections.
29389 \begin_layout Standard
29390 The header information in the dialog tab
29394 are saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29395 Many programs are able to extract this information to e.
29396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29400 \begin_inset space \space{}
29403 automatically recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29404 This is very useful to sort, classify, or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29407 Automatic fill header
29409 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29410 title and author settings.
29413 \begin_layout Standard
29416 Load in fullscreen mode
29418 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29421 \begin_layout Standard
29422 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29423 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29429 For an explanation of them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29439 \begin_layout Section
29440 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29443 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29450 \begin_layout Subsection
29452 \begin_inset Index idx
29455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29464 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29471 \begin_layout Standard
29472 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29473 constructs, but not all.
29474 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29475 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29476 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29477 is for every problem a LaTeX-package.
29478 But LyX can of course not be up to date and support all packages and their
29482 \begin_layout Standard
29483 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29485 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29487 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29489 \begin_inset space ~
29494 or by the toolbar button
29507 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29515 \begin_layout Standard
29516 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29517 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29518 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29519 using the LaTeX-command
29525 , you can write the command part
29531 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29535 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29536 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29537 the following example:
29540 \begin_layout Standard
29541 \begin_inset Graphics
29542 filename clipart/ERT.png
29550 \begin_layout Standard
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29555 This is a line with a
29559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29582 \begin_layout Standard
29583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29591 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29592 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29600 \begin_layout Subsection
29601 Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29602 \begin_inset Argument 1
29605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29612 \begin_inset Index idx
29615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29624 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29632 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29633 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29634 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29643 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29644 any time if you know the right commands.
29646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29650 \begin_inset space \space{}
29653 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the
29655 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29656 all caption labels bold.
29657 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29659 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29663 \begin_layout Standard
29664 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29665 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29666 First you have to find out which and therefore look into the LaTeX package
29668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 As result you find that the package
29683 \begin_inset Index idx
29686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29687 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29693 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29695 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29701 \begin_layout Standard
29706 usepackage[options]{package name}
29709 \begin_layout Standard
29710 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29711 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29712 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29716 In your case the package name is
29721 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29726 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29727 So you add the command
29730 \begin_layout Standard
29735 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29738 \begin_layout Standard
29739 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29744 For more commands provided by the
29748 package, have a look at its documentation,
29749 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29766 For example if you use a
29770 class, you don't need the package
29774 , you can instead write
29777 \begin_layout Standard
29782 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29787 \begin_layout Standard
29788 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29789 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29790 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29797 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29800 \begin_layout Standard
29801 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29802 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29804 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29805 the previous section.
29808 \begin_layout Standard
29809 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29811 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29813 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29820 \begin_layout Standard
29821 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29827 \begin_layout Standard
29831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29841 \begin_inset Note Note
29844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29845 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29853 \begin_layout Left Header
29854 \begin_inset Argument 1
29857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29877 \begin_inset Note Note
29880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29881 defines the header line as described below
29889 \begin_layout Center Header
29890 \begin_inset Argument 1
29893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29902 \begin_layout Right Header
29903 \begin_inset Argument 1
29906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29927 \begin_layout Left Footer
29928 \begin_inset Argument 1
29931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29952 \begin_layout Center Footer
29953 \begin_inset Argument 1
29956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29967 \begin_inset Newline newline
29971 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
29977 \begin_layout Right Footer
29978 \begin_inset Argument 1
29981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30003 \begin_layout Section
30004 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30007 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30012 \begin_inset Index idx
30015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30016 Document ! Header/Footer line
30022 \begin_inset Index idx
30025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30035 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30036 to set the headings style to
30042 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30048 \begin_inset space ~
30054 As a second step add in the menu
30056 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30057 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30064 Custom Header/Footerlines
30065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30069 This module offers the following 6
30070 \begin_inset space ~
30076 \begin_layout Description
30078 \begin_inset space ~
30082 \begin_inset space ~
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30090 \begin_inset space ~
30094 \begin_inset space ~
30100 \begin_layout Description
30102 \begin_inset space ~
30106 \begin_inset space ~
30110 \begin_inset space ~
30114 \begin_inset space ~
30118 \begin_inset space ~
30124 \begin_layout Standard
30125 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30128 \begin_layout Standard
30129 Normally, headers and footers are set up in the beginning of the document.
30130 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30132 \begin_inset space ~
30136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30138 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30142 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30146 \begin_inset Float figure
30152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30155 \begin_inset Tabular
30156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30157 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30158 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30160 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30180 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30209 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30220 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30224 The normal text on the page goes here.
30225 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30227 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30228 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30233 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30242 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30300 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30318 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30323 name "fig:Page-layout"
30327 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30340 \begin_layout Subsection
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30345 To define your header line, add all 3
30346 \begin_inset space ~
30350 The things you add to the styles appear on uneven pages, the things in
30351 the optional arguments on even pages.
30352 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30354 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30355 Defining the footer line works similar.
30358 \begin_layout Standard
30359 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30362 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 \begin_inset space ~
30383 \begin_layout Description
30386 thepage prints the current page number
30389 \begin_layout Description
30392 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30395 \begin_layout Description
30398 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30401 \begin_layout Description
30404 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30405 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30412 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30415 because it usually goes in a left header.
30418 \begin_layout Description
30421 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30422 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30424 It is normally used in the right header.
30427 \begin_layout Subsection
30428 Default header/footer
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30432 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30433 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30434 footer has the page number.
30435 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30436 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30437 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30440 \begin_inset space ~
30448 \begin_layout Subsection
30452 \begin_layout Standard
30453 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30454 Some pages are different.
30455 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30456 a new part or chapter in your book.
30457 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30458 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30459 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30462 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30463 Header and footer decoration line
30466 \begin_layout Standard
30467 By default, you get a 0.4
30468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30471 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30472 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30484 in the following scheme:
30487 \begin_layout Standard
30494 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30497 \begin_layout Standard
30498 Where thickness is a size in standard units like
30507 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30515 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30516 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30517 \begin_inset space ~
30521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30531 Several header/footer lines
30534 \begin_layout Standard
30535 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30536 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30537 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30539 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30551 in this scheme in your document preamble:
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30561 headheight}{height}
30564 \begin_layout Standard
30565 Where height is a size in standard units.
30566 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30567 your header/footer and preview your document as PDF.
30568 Then open the LaTeX logfile via the menu
30570 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30584 and look via the button
30587 \begin_inset space ~
30592 if you find a warning of the package
30597 \begin_inset Index idx
30600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30601 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30607 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30608 for your header/footer.
30611 \begin_layout Subsection
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30616 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30617 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30618 This example consists of the following definition:
30621 \begin_layout Description
30623 \begin_inset space ~
30632 , empty optional argument
30635 \begin_layout Description
30637 \begin_inset space ~
30640 Header empty, empty optional argument
30643 \begin_layout Description
30645 \begin_inset space ~
30654 in the optional argument
30657 \begin_layout Description
30659 \begin_inset space ~
30668 in the optional argument
30671 \begin_layout Description
30673 \begin_inset space ~
30685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30689 \begin_inset Newline newline
30693 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30700 in the optional argument
30703 \begin_layout Description
30705 \begin_inset space ~
30714 , empty optional argument
30717 \begin_layout Description
30720 headrulewidth set to 2
30721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30727 \begin_layout Standard
30728 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30729 For more special things like e.
30730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30734 \begin_inset space ~
30737 thumb-indexes, see the manual of the
30742 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30751 \begin_layout Standard
30752 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30758 \begin_layout Standard
30762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30766 pagestyle{headings}
30772 \begin_inset Note Note
30775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30776 switches back to page style with the default headings
30784 \begin_layout Section
30785 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30788 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30793 \begin_inset Index idx
30796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30803 \begin_inset Index idx
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30815 \begin_layout Standard
30816 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
30817 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30818 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30821 \begin_layout Subsection
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30826 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
30831 \begin_inset Index idx
30834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30835 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
30840 (on some systems named simply
30845 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
30847 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30853 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
30854 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30862 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
30863 automatically installed together with LyX.
30866 \begin_layout Subsection
30870 \begin_layout Standard
30871 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
30872 LaTeX, activate the option
30875 \begin_inset space ~
30882 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30888 \begin_inset space ~
30892 \begin_inset space ~
30895 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30902 \begin_inset space ~
30915 \begin_inset space ~
30920 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30923 \begin_layout Standard
30924 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
30928 \begin_layout Standard
30929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30937 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
30938 generated by activating the option
30941 \begin_inset space ~
30947 Reopening the documents will fix such problems.
30955 \begin_layout Subsection
30956 Selected document parts
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
30961 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
30962 that are not yet supported by LyX.
30963 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
30965 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30969 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
30970 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
30971 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
30981 which is not yet supported by LyX.
30985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30992 is explained in section
30994 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
30999 \begin_inset space ~
31009 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31010 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31012 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31014 Here is the result:
31017 \begin_layout Standard
31018 \begin_inset Preview
31020 \begin_layout Standard
31025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31029 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31035 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31045 height_special "totalheight"
31048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31073 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31079 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31102 Previewing works also for colors.
31103 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31121 is explained in section
31128 \begin_inset space ~
31141 \begin_layout Standard
31142 \begin_inset Preview
31144 \begin_layout Standard
31148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31167 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31172 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 \begin_layout Standard
31192 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31198 \begin_layout Standard
31199 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31200 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31201 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31203 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31204 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31205 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31206 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31210 \begin_layout Subsection
31214 \begin_layout Standard
31215 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31218 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31220 \begin_inset space ~
31225 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31226 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph where the cursor is
31228 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31229 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31230 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31231 the source view window.
31234 \begin_layout Section
31235 Advanced Find and Replace
31236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31238 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31243 \begin_inset Index idx
31246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31253 \begin_inset Index idx
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31265 \begin_layout Subsection
31269 \begin_layout Standard
31270 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31271 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31272 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31273 The key-features are:
31276 \begin_layout Itemize
31277 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31278 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31279 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31283 \begin_layout Itemize
31284 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31285 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31286 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31287 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31290 \begin_layout Itemize
31291 Search may be widened to a specific
31296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31300 \begin_inset space ~
31303 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31304 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31311 \begin_layout Itemize
31312 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31313 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31318 \begin_inset space ~
31321 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31324 \begin_layout Subsection
31328 \begin_layout Standard
31329 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31331 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31344 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31347 ) or the toolbar button
31350 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31356 Advanced Find and Replace
31361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31370 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31375 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31378 arg "break-paragraph"
31382 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31383 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31384 Pressing repeatedly
31387 arg "break-paragraph"
31390 keeps searching forward while pressing
31394 searches backwards.
31397 \begin_layout Standard
31402 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31412 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31416 Searching for mathematics
31419 \begin_layout Standard
31420 Mathematical formulas may be searched for by typing them the
31425 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31428 or also something more complex like
31429 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31433 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31434 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31435 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31436 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31446 \begin_layout Standard
31447 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31448 This is done by switching to the
31452 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31457 This way, entering in the
31464 \begin_layout Itemize
31465 a plain word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring
31466 in emphasized or boldface.
31469 \begin_layout Itemize
31470 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31471 instances with same face only, and within the same text style only.
31474 \begin_layout Itemize
31475 a plain word in a section heading, and searching for it, finds occurrences
31476 of if only within section headings.
31477 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31478 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31482 \begin_layout Itemize
31483 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31484 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31491 \begin_layout Standard
31492 The document segments entered in the
31496 editor can be replaced with the text segments entered in the
31504 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31508 button or alternatively
31515 arg "break-paragraph"
31522 while the cursor is in the
31532 \begin_layout Standard
31533 You can replace with full-featured formatted LyX segments.
31534 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability may be (just to mention
31538 \begin_layout Itemize
31539 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31540 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31548 with its typewriter version
31549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31563 \begin_layout Itemize
31564 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31570 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31582 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31589 (you may want to enable the
31597 options and disable the
31605 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31613 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31614 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31618 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31621 , or occurrences of
31622 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31626 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31632 \begin_layout Subsection
31636 \begin_layout Standard
31637 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31642 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31644 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31646 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31655 You can search for regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31661 This is done via the menu
31663 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31664 Insert Regular Expression
31666 while the cursor is in the
31671 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31672 expression matching rules
31676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31677 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31686 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31687 to match expressions.
31692 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31693 same text in the document.
31694 It is allowed to cut and paste regexp-mode insets as usual.
31695 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31698 \begin_layout Enumerate
31699 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31704 editor the fraction
31705 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31709 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31712 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31713 fractions with the given denominator.
31716 \begin_layout Enumerate
31717 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31729 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31734 regular expression and adding for it an emphasized or bold face, finds
31735 all emphasized and bold face text, respectively.
31737 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31740 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31741 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31744 \begin_layout Standard
31745 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31746 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31747 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31750 , and referring back to them through
31751 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31755 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31759 For example, try searching for the regexp
31760 \begin_inset Newline newline
31763 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31766 \begin_inset Newline newline
31769 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31776 \begin_layout Standard
31777 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31786 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31787 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31788 sub-expressions is absolute.
31790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31794 \begin_inset space ~
31798 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31801 always refers to the first occurrence of
31802 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31805 in all entered regexps.
31813 \begin_layout Section
31815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31817 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31822 \begin_inset Index idx
31825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31834 \begin_layout Standard
31835 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
31838 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31845 or the toolbar button
31848 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31851 starts the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
31852 beginning of the currently selected text.
31853 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31854 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31855 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31856 scrolled so that it is visible.
31857 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31858 n, if any could be found.
31859 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31863 field, double-click directly invokes the replacement.
31864 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31867 \begin_layout Standard
31868 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31871 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31875 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31876 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31877 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31878 This works if you have marked the different languages appropriately and
31879 have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31880 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31883 \begin_layout Subsection
31887 \begin_layout Standard
31888 In LyX's preferences dialog under
31891 \begin_inset space ~
31894 Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31897 you can set the following things:
31900 \begin_layout Description
31902 \begin_inset space ~
31905 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
31906 Depending on your platform,
31920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31921 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
31922 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
31937 \begin_layout Description
31939 \begin_inset space ~
31942 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
31943 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
31946 \begin_layout Description
31948 \begin_inset space ~
31951 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
31953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31957 \begin_inset space \space{}
31961 This should normally not be needed.
31964 \begin_layout Description
31966 \begin_inset space ~
31970 \begin_inset space ~
31973 words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
31975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31985 \begin_layout Description
31987 \begin_inset space ~
31990 continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it.
31991 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
31992 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
31993 appear in the context menu.
31994 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
31998 \begin_layout Description
32000 \begin_inset space ~
32004 \begin_inset space ~
32008 \begin_inset space ~
32011 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked
32015 \begin_layout Section
32017 \begin_inset Index idx
32020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32029 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32036 \begin_layout Standard
32037 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32038 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32048 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32050 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32059 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32060 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
32061 are available for many languages.
32064 \begin_layout Standard
32065 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32069 \begin_layout Subsection
32070 Setting up the thesaurus
32073 \begin_layout Standard
32081 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32086 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32091 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32097 en_EN for English).
32098 For instance, the English files are named:
32101 \begin_layout Itemize
32105 \begin_layout Itemize
32109 \begin_layout Standard
32110 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed, these
32111 files should be already on your system.
32112 If not, you can get dictionaries either from
32113 \begin_inset Flex URL
32116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32118 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/dictionaries/trunk/thes
32124 \begin_inset Flex URL
32127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32129 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org/en/search/node/thesaurus
32138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32139 Note that, as of OpenOffice
32140 \begin_inset space ~
32144 \begin_inset Flex URL
32147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32149 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org
32154 are usually packed in extension archives (
32158 ) that contain other files such as spellchecker dictionaries besides the
32160 These archives are simple zip files, so you can unpack them as you would
32161 unpack a zip archive.
32174 files of all languages you want to use into one directory (do not use subfolder
32175 s), and specify the path to this directory in
32177 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32178 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32182 Now the thesaurus should be ready to use.
32185 \begin_layout Subsection
32186 Using the thesaurus
32189 \begin_layout Standard
32190 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32192 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32195 or the toolbar button
32198 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32201 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32203 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32205 The proposals are grouped into categories.
32206 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32207 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32216 ), related terms (such as
32219 \begin_inset space ~
32228 ), compounds (such as
32231 \begin_inset space ~
32240 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32249 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32253 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32254 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32258 \begin_layout Standard
32259 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32260 the dictionary, such as the above
32264 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32269 \begin_inset space \space{}
32272 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32273 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32274 For example looking up the word form
32275 \change_deleted 2090807402 1338765333
32286 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32292 \change_inserted 2090807402 1338765282
32293 The thesuarus is able to resolve inflected forms (so if you enter
32297 , it will resolve it to the form
32301 which is in the dictionary).
32302 However, this may not always work.
32303 So if you do not get any results for inflected forms, try the lemma form.
32306 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e.
32307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32311 \begin_inset space \space{}
32322 s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and
32323 also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted
32324 part will be replaced, thus the ending remains).
32327 \begin_layout Section
32329 \begin_inset Index idx
32332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32339 \begin_inset Index idx
32342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32343 Document ! Change Tracking
32349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32351 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32358 \begin_layout Standard
32359 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32360 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32361 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32362 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32364 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32366 \begin_inset space ~
32369 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32371 \begin_inset space ~
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32380 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32394 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32395 You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
32398 \begin_inset space ~
32402 \begin_inset space ~
32412 \begin_inset Index idx
32415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32416 Color ! Change tracking
32421 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32422 the cursor is in changed text.
32423 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32426 arg "changes-merge"
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32433 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32434 \begin_inset Index idx
32437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32447 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32453 \begin_layout Standard
32454 \begin_inset Graphics
32455 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32463 \begin_layout Standard
32464 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32470 \begin_layout Standard
32471 The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
32475 \begin_layout Standard
32476 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32482 \begin_layout Standard
32483 \begin_inset Tabular
32484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32485 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32497 arg "changes-track"
32505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32511 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32516 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32518 \begin_inset space ~
32527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32536 arg "changes-output"
32544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32550 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32555 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32557 \begin_inset space ~
32561 \begin_inset space ~
32565 \begin_inset space ~
32574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32595 Jumps to the next change
32601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32610 arg "change-accept"
32618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32624 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32629 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32649 arg "change-reject"
32657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32663 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32665 \begin_inset space ~
32668 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32670 \begin_inset space ~
32679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32688 arg "changes-merge"
32696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32704 \begin_inset space ~
32707 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32709 \begin_inset space ~
32718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32727 arg "all-changes-accept"
32735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32741 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32743 \begin_inset space ~
32746 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32748 \begin_inset space ~
32752 \begin_inset space ~
32761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32770 arg "all-changes-reject"
32778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32784 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32786 \begin_inset space ~
32789 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32791 \begin_inset space ~
32795 \begin_inset space ~
32804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32827 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32828 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32830 \begin_inset space ~
32839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32862 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32864 \begin_inset space ~
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32881 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32888 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
32889 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
32890 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
32891 the next change after the current cursor position.
32892 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
32893 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
32894 step to the next change.
32895 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
32898 \begin_layout Standard
32899 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
32900 to describe a change.
32903 \begin_layout Standard
32904 To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package
32909 \begin_inset Index idx
32912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32913 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
32919 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
32920 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32926 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
32929 \begin_layout Section
32930 Comparison of Documents
32931 \begin_inset Index idx
32934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32935 Comparison of documents
32943 \begin_layout Standard
32944 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
32946 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32950 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
32952 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
32953 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
32957 \begin_inset space ~
32961 \begin_inset space ~
32965 \begin_inset space ~
32974 \begin_inset space ~
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32986 \begin_inset space ~
32990 \begin_inset space ~
32994 \begin_inset space ~
32999 enables the change tracking option
33002 \begin_inset space ~
33006 \begin_inset space ~
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33015 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33018 \begin_layout Section
33019 International Support
33020 \begin_inset Index idx
33023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33024 International support
33032 \begin_layout Standard
33033 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33034 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33035 up LyX to use them:
33036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33038 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33045 \begin_layout Standard
33046 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33047 \begin_inset space ~
33051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33053 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33060 \begin_layout Subsection
33062 \begin_inset Index idx
33065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33072 \begin_inset Index idx
33075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33076 Document ! Settings
33082 \begin_inset Index idx
33085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33086 Document ! Language
33094 \begin_layout Standard
33097 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33098 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33101 dialog lets you set
33103 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33108 \begin_layout Standard
33113 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33117 \begin_inset space ~
33122 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33123 For details about the different encoding options see section
33124 \begin_inset space ~
33128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33130 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33137 \begin_layout Subsection
33138 Keyboard mapping configuration
33139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33141 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33149 If you have for example a U.
33150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33153 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33154 can use an alternate keymap.
33155 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33156 use an Italian keymap.
33159 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33160 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33161 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33164 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33165 \begin_inset space ~
33169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33171 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33176 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33177 which one you want to use.
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33182 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33183 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33187 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33188 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33189 one to support the characters you want.
33190 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33197 \begin_layout Chapter
33200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33202 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33209 \begin_layout Standard
33210 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33211 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33212 topic inside the user's guide.
33215 \begin_layout Section
33217 \begin_inset Index idx
33220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33229 \begin_layout Standard
33234 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33237 \begin_layout Subsection
33241 \begin_layout Standard
33242 Creates a new document.
33245 \begin_layout Subsection
33249 \begin_layout Standard
33250 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33251 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33252 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33255 \begin_layout Subsection
33259 \begin_layout Standard
33263 \begin_layout Subsection
33267 \begin_layout Standard
33268 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33269 Click there on a file to open it.
33272 \begin_layout Subsection
33276 \begin_layout Standard
33277 Closes the current document.
33280 \begin_layout Subsection
33284 \begin_layout Standard
33285 Closes all opened documents.
33288 \begin_layout Subsection
33292 \begin_layout Standard
33293 Saves the actual document.
33296 \begin_layout Subsection
33300 \begin_layout Standard
33301 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33304 \begin_layout Subsection
33308 \begin_layout Standard
33309 Saves all opened documents.
33312 \begin_layout Subsection
33316 \begin_layout Standard
33317 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33320 \begin_layout Subsection
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33325 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33326 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33327 It is described in the section
33329 Version Control in LyX
33333 Additional Features
33338 \begin_layout Subsection
33342 \begin_layout Standard
33343 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33344 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33346 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33349 \begin_layout Standard
33350 When using the menu entry
33353 \begin_inset space ~
33358 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33362 \begin_inset space ~
33366 \begin_inset space ~
33371 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33372 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33375 \begin_layout Subsection
33377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33386 \begin_layout Standard
33387 You can export your document to various file formats.
33388 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33389 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33390 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33393 \begin_layout Standard
33394 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33396 \begin_inset space ~
33400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33402 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33409 \begin_layout Description
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33429 yX format of the special LyX
33430 \begin_inset space ~
33433 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33434 \begin_inset Newline newline
33437 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX.
33440 \begin_layout Description
33441 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33447 \begin_layout Description
33449 \begin_inset space ~
33452 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33458 \begin_layout Description
33459 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33460 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33461 files paths or file names in your document.
33462 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33469 \begin_layout Description
33470 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33471 in files paths or file names
33474 \begin_layout Description
33476 \begin_inset space ~
33483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33490 eX) DVI-format using the program
33494 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33513 \begin_layout Description
33515 \begin_inset space ~
33518 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33522 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33527 \begin_layout Description
33528 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33532 \begin_layout Description
33534 \begin_inset space ~
33538 \begin_inset space ~
33541 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33545 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33553 \begin_layout Description
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33568 \begin_inset space ~
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33592 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33597 \begin_layout Description
33604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33612 \begin_inset space ~
33617 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
33618 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33622 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33625 \begin_layout Description
33632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33645 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
33646 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33654 \begin_layout Description
33661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33669 \begin_inset space ~
33680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33693 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33698 \begin_layout Description
33700 \begin_inset space ~
33704 \begin_inset space ~
33713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33722 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
33723 music notation software
33728 \begin_layout Description
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33745 \begin_inset space ~
33749 \begin_inset space ~
33752 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
33753 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
33754 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
33757 \begin_layout Description
33764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33774 \begin_inset space ~
33777 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
33778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33793 represent the version number)
33796 \begin_layout Description
33803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33812 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
33815 \begin_layout Description
33816 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
33821 \begin_layout Description
33822 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
33824 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
33827 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
33831 \begin_layout Description
33835 \begin_inset space ~
33840 PDF-format using the program
33844 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33847 \begin_layout Description
33851 \begin_inset space ~
33858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33867 PDF-format using the program
33871 , produces PDF-files directly
33874 \begin_layout Description
33878 \begin_inset space ~
33883 PDF-format using the program
33887 , produces PDF-files directly
33890 \begin_layout Description
33894 \begin_inset space ~
33899 PDF-format using the program
33903 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33906 \begin_layout Description
33910 \begin_inset space ~
33917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33926 PDF-format using the program
33930 , produces PDF-files directly
33933 \begin_layout Description
33937 \begin_inset space ~
33945 \begin_layout Description
33949 \begin_inset space ~
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33958 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
33959 and then exported as text using the program
33964 \begin_layout Description
33969 PostScript format using the program
33974 \begin_layout Description
33975 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
33976 programming language
33989 it is possible to use
33996 \begin_layout Standard
33997 If one of the menu entries
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34013 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34014 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34015 \begin_inset space ~
34019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34021 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34026 \begin_inset Index idx
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 Reconfiguration of LyX
34038 \begin_layout Subsection
34042 \begin_layout Standard
34043 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34044 format or send it to a printer.
34045 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34046 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34052 For more information have a look at section
34053 \begin_inset space ~
34057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34059 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34066 \begin_layout Subsection
34070 \begin_layout Standard
34071 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34072 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34073 prefix, see section
34074 \begin_inset space ~
34078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34080 reference "sec:Paths"
34085 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34094 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34095 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34096 \begin_inset space ~
34100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34102 reference "sub:Converters"
34109 \begin_layout Subsection
34110 New and Close Window
34113 \begin_layout Standard
34114 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34117 \begin_layout Subsection
34121 \begin_layout Standard
34122 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34125 \begin_layout Section
34127 \begin_inset Index idx
34130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34139 \begin_layout Subsection
34143 \begin_layout Standard
34144 Described in section
34145 \begin_inset space ~
34149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34151 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34158 \begin_layout Subsection
34159 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34162 \begin_layout Standard
34163 Described in section
34164 \begin_inset space ~
34168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34170 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34177 \begin_layout Subsection
34181 \begin_layout Standard
34182 Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in.
34183 If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34186 \begin_layout Subsection
34190 \begin_layout Standard
34191 Selects the whole document.
34194 \begin_layout Subsection
34195 Find & Replace (Quick)
34198 \begin_layout Standard
34199 Described in section
34200 \begin_inset space ~
34204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34206 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34213 \begin_layout Subsection
34214 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34218 Described in section
34219 \begin_inset space ~
34223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34225 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34232 \begin_layout Subsection
34233 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34236 \begin_layout Standard
34237 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
34241 \begin_layout Subsection
34245 \begin_layout Standard
34246 Described in section
34247 \begin_inset space ~
34251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34253 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34260 \begin_layout Subsection
34262 \begin_inset Index idx
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34266 Paragraph ! Settings
34274 \begin_layout Standard
34275 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34276 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34280 \begin_layout Standard
34281 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34282 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
34284 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34290 \begin_inset space ~
34298 \begin_layout Subsection
34299 Table Settings and Math
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34305 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34306 The properties of tables are described in section
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34313 reference "sec:Tables"
34317 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34318 \begin_inset space ~
34322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34324 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34331 \begin_layout Subsection
34332 Increase / Decrease List Depth
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34336 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34338 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34339 \begin_inset space ~
34343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34345 reference "sec:Nesting"
34350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34352 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34359 \begin_layout Section
34361 \begin_inset Index idx
34364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34373 \begin_layout Standard
34374 At the bottom of the
34378 menu the opened documents are listed.
34381 \begin_layout Subsection
34382 Open/Close all Insets
34385 \begin_layout Standard
34386 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34389 \begin_layout Subsection
34390 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34393 \begin_layout Standard
34394 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34397 \begin_layout Standard
34398 Math macros are described in the
34405 \begin_layout Subsection
34409 \begin_layout Standard
34410 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34412 \begin_inset space ~
34416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34418 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34425 \begin_layout Subsection
34429 \begin_layout Standard
34430 Opens a window showing console messages.
34431 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34435 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34436 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34439 \begin_layout Subsection
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34444 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
34445 default output format either in the preferences (see sec.
34446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34452 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34456 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34463 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34467 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
34468 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34469 \begin_inset space ~
34473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34475 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34480 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34481 The default output format is
34484 \begin_inset space ~
34492 \begin_layout Subsection
34493 View (Other Formats)
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
34498 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
34499 actual document with an external program.
34500 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
34501 the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
34502 All possible formats are listed in section
34503 \begin_inset space ~
34507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34509 reference "sub:Export"
34514 You should at least see the menu entry
34519 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
34520 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34521 \begin_inset space ~
34525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34527 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34532 \begin_inset Index idx
34535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34536 Reconfiguration of LyX
34544 \begin_layout Standard
34545 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
34546 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34547 \begin_inset space ~
34551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34553 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34558 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34561 \begin_layout Subsection
34565 \begin_layout Standard
34566 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
34567 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
34570 \begin_layout Subsection
34571 Update (Other Formats)
34574 \begin_layout Standard
34575 With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats
34576 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
34579 \begin_layout Subsection
34580 View Master Document
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34600 \begin_inset space ~
34605 manual for more information on this topic).
34606 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
34607 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
34612 generates the output of the whole book, while
34616 will just output the chapter alone.
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34621 in the preferences (see sec.
34622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34628 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34632 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34639 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34646 \begin_layout Subsection
34647 Update Master Document
34650 \begin_layout Standard
34651 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34667 \begin_inset space ~
34672 manual for more information on this topic).
34673 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
34674 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
34677 \begin_layout Standard
34678 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34679 in the preferences (see sec.
34680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34686 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34690 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34697 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34704 \begin_layout Subsection
34708 \begin_layout Standard
34709 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
34710 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34711 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34712 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
34713 or more documents at the same time.
34714 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
34721 \begin_layout Subsection
34725 \begin_layout Standard
34726 Closes a split view.
34729 \begin_layout Subsection
34733 \begin_layout Standard
34734 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34735 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34736 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
34737 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34738 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34741 \begin_layout Subsection
34743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34745 name "sub:Toolbars"
34750 \begin_inset Index idx
34753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34762 \begin_layout Standard
34763 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34764 All toolbars and the
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34772 can be turned on and off.
34777 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34789 \begin_inset space ~
34797 \begin_inset space ~
34806 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
34810 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
34817 \begin_layout Standard
34822 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
34826 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34827 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34828 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34829 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34830 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
34833 \begin_layout Standard
34834 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34835 \begin_inset space ~
34839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34841 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34848 \begin_layout Section
34850 \begin_inset Index idx
34853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34862 \begin_layout Subsection
34866 \begin_layout Standard
34867 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34868 \begin_inset space ~
34872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34874 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34885 \begin_layout Subsection
34887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34889 name "sub:Special-Character"
34896 \begin_layout Standard
34897 Here you can insert the following characters:
34900 \begin_layout Description
34901 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
34902 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
34903 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
34904 \begin_inset Newline newline
34908 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34916 Not all characters will be visible in the
34920 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
34922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34928 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
34932 ) can display every character.
34940 \begin_layout Description
34941 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
34945 \begin_layout Description
34947 \begin_inset space ~
34951 \begin_inset space ~
34954 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
34955 \begin_inset space ~
34959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34961 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
34968 \begin_layout Description
34970 \begin_inset space ~
34973 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
34976 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34986 \begin_layout Description
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34992 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809482
34994 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809484
34998 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809487
35000 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35004 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809513
35005 in the quotation marks style selected in the
35007 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35019 \begin_layout Description
35021 \begin_inset space ~
35024 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35028 \begin_layout Description
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35033 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35037 \begin_layout Description
35039 \begin_inset space ~
35042 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35046 \begin_layout Description
35048 \begin_inset space ~
35052 \begin_inset Index idx
35055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35062 \begin_inset Index idx
35065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35066 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35072 \change_deleted -712698321 1345808954
35073 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset
35074 \change_inserted -712698321 1345808969
35075 Inserts a box where
35076 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809001
35081 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809047
35082 commands to create IPA phonetic
35085 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809189
35086 from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which
35087 provides a large set of these symbols
35091 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809068
35093 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809068
35097 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809224
35098 with traditional LaTeX
35100 you must have the LaTeX-package
35105 \begin_inset Index idx
35108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35109 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35115 \begin_inset Newline newline
35119 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809282
35121 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809283
35124 ore information about this feature
35125 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809286
35126 we refer you to the documentation of
35129 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35137 and this Wiki-page:
35138 \begin_inset Newline newline
35142 \begin_inset Flex URL
35145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35147 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
35153 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809397
35154 can be found in the Linguistics manual (
35156 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35157 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35165 \begin_layout Subsection
35169 \begin_layout Standard
35170 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
35173 \begin_layout Description
35174 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35175 \begin_inset script superscript
35177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35186 \begin_layout Description
35187 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35188 \begin_inset script subscript
35190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35199 \begin_layout Description
35201 \begin_inset space ~
35204 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35211 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35218 \begin_layout Description
35220 \begin_inset space ~
35223 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35230 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35237 \begin_layout Description
35239 \begin_inset space ~
35242 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
35243 \begin_inset space ~
35247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35249 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35256 \begin_layout Description
35258 \begin_inset space ~
35261 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
35262 \begin_inset space ~
35266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35268 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35275 \begin_layout Description
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35280 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
35281 \begin_inset space ~
35285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35287 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35294 \begin_layout Description
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35299 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
35300 \begin_inset space ~
35304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35306 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35313 \begin_layout Description
35314 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35321 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35328 \begin_layout Description
35330 \begin_inset space ~
35333 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35340 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35347 \begin_layout Description
35349 \begin_inset space ~
35352 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
35353 \begin_inset space ~
35357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35359 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35366 \begin_layout Description
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35372 \begin_inset space ~
35375 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
35376 \begin_inset space ~
35380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35382 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35389 \begin_layout Description
35391 \begin_inset space ~
35394 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
35395 text line to the page border, see section
35396 \begin_inset space ~
35400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35402 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35409 \begin_layout Description
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35414 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
35415 \begin_inset space ~
35419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35421 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35428 \begin_layout Description
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35433 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
35434 text page to the page border, described in section
35435 \begin_inset space ~
35439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35441 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35448 \begin_layout Description
35450 \begin_inset space ~
35453 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35460 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35467 \begin_layout Description
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35473 \begin_inset space ~
35476 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
35477 \begin_inset space ~
35481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35483 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35490 \begin_layout Subsection
35494 \begin_layout Standard
35495 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35496 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
35498 \begin_inset space ~
35502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35504 reference "sec:toc"
35509 The index list is described in section
35510 \begin_inset space ~
35514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35516 reference "sec:Index"
35520 , the nomenclature in section
35521 \begin_inset space ~
35525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35527 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35531 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
35532 \begin_inset space ~
35536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35538 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
35545 \begin_layout Subsection
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 To insert floats, described in section
35551 \begin_inset space ~
35555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35557 reference "sec:Floats"
35564 \begin_layout Subsection
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 To insert notes, described in section
35570 \begin_inset space ~
35574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35576 reference "sec:Notes"
35583 \begin_layout Subsection
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35588 Inserts branch insets as described in section
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35595 reference "sec:Branches"
35602 \begin_layout Subsection
35606 \begin_layout Standard
35607 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35608 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35610 An example is the document class
35611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35618 with three custom insets.
35621 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35627 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35630 \begin_layout Subsection
35632 \begin_inset Index idx
35635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35644 \begin_layout Standard
35645 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35647 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
35654 \begin_inset space ~
35662 \begin_layout Subsection
35664 \begin_inset Index idx
35667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35676 \begin_layout Standard
35677 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35684 reference "sec:Minipages"
35689 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35704 \begin_layout Subsection
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35709 Inserts a citation as described in section
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35716 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35723 \begin_layout Subsection
35727 \begin_layout Standard
35728 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
35729 \begin_inset space ~
35733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35735 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35742 \begin_layout Subsection
35746 \begin_layout Standard
35747 Inserts a label as described in section
35748 \begin_inset space ~
35752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35754 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35761 \begin_layout Subsection
35763 \begin_inset Index idx
35766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35773 \begin_inset Index idx
35776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35777 Longtables ! Caption
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35786 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35787 Floats are described in section
35788 \begin_inset space ~
35792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35794 reference "sec:Floats"
35798 , captions in longtables are described in the section
35805 \begin_inset space ~
35813 \begin_layout Subsection
35817 \begin_layout Standard
35818 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35825 reference "sec:Index"
35832 \begin_layout Subsection
35836 \begin_layout Standard
35837 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
35838 \begin_inset space ~
35842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35844 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35851 \begin_layout Subsection
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35857 Tables are described in section
35858 \begin_inset space ~
35862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35864 reference "sec:Tables"
35871 \begin_layout Subsection
35875 \begin_layout Standard
35877 Graphics are described in section
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35884 reference "sec:Graphics"
35891 \begin_layout Subsection
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35896 Inserts a URL as described in section
35897 \begin_inset space ~
35901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35903 reference "sub:URLs"
35910 \begin_layout Subsection
35914 \begin_layout Standard
35915 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35922 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
35929 \begin_layout Subsection
35933 \begin_layout Standard
35934 Inserts a footnote, see section
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35941 reference "sec:Footnotes"
35948 \begin_layout Subsection
35952 \begin_layout Standard
35953 Inserts a marginal note, see section
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35960 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
35967 \begin_layout Subsection
35971 \begin_layout Standard
35972 Inserts a short title, see section
35973 \begin_inset space ~
35977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35979 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
35986 \begin_layout Subsection
35990 \begin_layout Standard
35991 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
35992 \begin_inset space ~
35996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35998 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36005 \begin_layout Subsection
36007 \begin_inset Index idx
36010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36019 \begin_layout Standard
36020 Inserts a program listings box.
36021 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36023 Program Code Listings
36028 \begin_inset space ~
36036 \begin_layout Subsection
36040 \begin_layout Standard
36041 Inserts the actual date.
36042 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36044 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36052 \begin_inset space ~
36060 \begin_layout Subsection
36064 \begin_layout Standard
36065 Inserts a preview inset, see section
36066 \begin_inset space ~
36070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36072 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36079 \begin_layout Section
36081 \begin_inset Index idx
36084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36093 \begin_layout Standard
36094 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36098 of the current document.
36099 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36102 \begin_layout Subsection
36106 \begin_layout Standard
36107 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36108 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36114 \begin_inset space \space{}
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36122 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36123 \begin_inset space ~
36126 2.5 and use the submenu
36129 \begin_inset space ~
36133 \begin_inset space ~
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36146 \begin_inset space ~
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36156 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36160 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36166 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36172 \begin_layout Standard
36173 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36174 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36177 \begin_layout Subsection
36178 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36181 \begin_layout Standard
36182 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
36186 \begin_layout Subsection
36190 \begin_layout Standard
36191 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36192 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36193 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36201 \begin_inset space ~
36209 \begin_layout Subsection
36213 \begin_layout Standard
36214 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
36215 in the output, see section
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36231 manual for a detailed description.
36234 \begin_layout Section
36236 \begin_inset Index idx
36239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36248 \begin_layout Subsection
36252 \begin_layout Standard
36253 Change Tracking is described in section
36254 \begin_inset space ~
36258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36260 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36267 \begin_layout Subsection
36272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36282 \begin_layout Standard
36283 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36285 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
36288 \begin_layout Standard
36289 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
36294 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36297 \begin_layout Subsection
36301 \begin_layout Standard
36302 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
36303 \begin_inset space ~
36307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36309 reference "sec:Navigating"
36314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36316 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
36323 \begin_layout Subsection
36324 Start Appendix Here
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
36329 position as described in section
36330 \begin_inset space ~
36334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36336 reference "sec:Appendices"
36343 \begin_layout Subsection
36347 \begin_layout Standard
36348 Un/compresses the current document.
36351 \begin_layout Subsection
36355 \begin_layout Standard
36356 The document settings are described in appendix
36357 \begin_inset space ~
36361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36363 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36370 \begin_layout Section
36372 \begin_inset Index idx
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36384 \begin_layout Subsection
36388 \begin_layout Standard
36389 Spell checking is explained in section
36390 \begin_inset space ~
36394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36396 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
36403 \begin_layout Subsection
36407 \begin_layout Standard
36408 The thesaurus is described in section
36409 \begin_inset space ~
36413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36415 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
36422 \begin_layout Subsection
36424 \begin_inset Index idx
36427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36434 \begin_inset Index idx
36437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36446 \begin_layout Standard
36447 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
36451 \begin_layout Subsection
36453 \begin_inset Index idx
36456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36465 \begin_layout Standard
36466 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
36470 \begin_layout Subsection
36472 \begin_inset Index idx
36475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36476 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
36480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36487 Reconfiguration of LyX
36491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36504 \begin_inset Index idx
36507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36508 Reconfiguration of LyX
36516 \begin_layout Standard
36517 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
36518 and programs it needs; see also section
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36525 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36532 \begin_layout Subsection
36536 \begin_layout Standard
36537 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36544 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
36551 \begin_layout Section
36553 \begin_inset Index idx
36556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36565 \begin_layout Standard
36566 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
36568 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36576 \begin_inset space ~
36581 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
36582 found by LyX (see also section
36583 \begin_inset space ~
36587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36589 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
36596 \begin_layout Section
36598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36600 name "sec:Toolbars"
36607 \begin_layout Standard
36608 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
36609 \begin_inset space ~
36613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36615 reference "sub:Toolbars"
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36623 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
36624 This is described in the
36626 Additional Features
36631 \begin_layout Subsection
36633 \begin_inset Index idx
36636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36645 \begin_layout Standard
36646 \begin_inset Graphics
36647 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
36655 \begin_layout Standard
36656 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36662 \begin_layout Standard
36663 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
36668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36680 \begin_inset Note Note
36683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36684 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
36689 manual for more information.
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36698 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36704 \begin_layout Standard
36705 \begin_inset Tabular
36706 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
36707 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36708 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36709 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36715 \begin_inset Graphics
36716 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
36726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36730 pull-down box for the environments
36743 \begin_layout Standard
36744 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
36750 \begin_layout Standard
36752 \begin_inset Tabular
36753 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="2">
36754 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36755 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36756 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36780 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36810 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36817 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36840 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36856 arg "dialog-show print"
36864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36870 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36886 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36900 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36930 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36960 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36990 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37020 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37050 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37066 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37080 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37104 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37118 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37119 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37147 Emphasize text, function of the
37149 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37151 \begin_inset space ~
37162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37183 Set text to noun style, function of the
37185 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37207 arg "textstyle-apply"
37215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37219 Formats text using the current settings in the
37221 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37223 \begin_inset space ~
37234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37257 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37258 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37278 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
37286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37292 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37306 arg "tabular-insert"
37314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37320 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37336 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
37344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37348 Toggle outline window on/off,
37350 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37366 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
37374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37378 Toggle math toolbar on/off
37384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37393 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
37401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37405 Toggle table toolbar on/off
37418 \begin_layout Subsection
37420 \begin_inset Index idx
37423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37432 \begin_layout Standard
37433 \begin_inset Graphics
37434 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
37442 \begin_layout Standard
37443 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37449 \begin_layout Standard
37450 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37454 \begin_layout Standard
37455 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37461 \begin_layout Standard
37462 \begin_inset Tabular
37463 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
37464 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37465 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37466 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37503 arg "layout Enumerate"
37511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37530 arg "layout Itemize"
37538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37584 arg "layout Description"
37592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37611 arg "depth-increment"
37619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37625 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_inset space ~
37640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37649 arg "depth-decrement"
37657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37663 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37687 arg "float-insert figure"
37695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37701 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37702 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37718 arg "float-insert table"
37726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37732 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37733 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37763 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37779 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
37787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37793 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37809 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
37817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37823 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37853 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37855 \begin_inset space ~
37864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37873 arg "nomencl-insert"
37881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37887 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37889 \begin_inset space ~
37898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37907 arg "footnote-insert"
37915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37921 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37937 arg "marginalnote-insert"
37945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37951 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37953 \begin_inset space ~
37962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37985 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37986 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38006 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38020 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38050 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38080 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38115 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38130 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38160 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38161 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38163 \begin_inset space ~
38172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38181 arg "dialog-show character"
38189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38195 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38197 \begin_inset space ~
38206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 arg "layout-paragraph"
38223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38229 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38231 \begin_inset space ~
38240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38249 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38263 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38277 \begin_layout Subsection
38278 View / Update Toolbar
38279 \begin_inset Index idx
38282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38283 Toolbar ! View / Update
38291 \begin_layout Standard
38292 \begin_inset Graphics
38293 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
38300 \begin_layout Standard
38301 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38307 \begin_layout Standard
38308 The view / update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the
38312 \begin_layout Standard
38313 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38319 \begin_layout Standard
38320 \begin_inset Tabular
38321 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
38322 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38323 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38324 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38348 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38364 arg "buffer-update"
38372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38378 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 arg "master-buffer-view"
38402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38424 arg "master-buffer-update"
38432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38438 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38440 \begin_inset space ~
38449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38458 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
38466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38472 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38473 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38474 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38475 Synchronize with Output
38481 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 \begin_inset Graphics
38487 filename ../images/view-others.png
38489 groupId toolbarbuttons
38500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38506 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38507 View (Other Formats)
38513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38518 \begin_inset Graphics
38519 filename ../images/update-others.png
38521 groupId toolbarbuttons
38530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38537 Update (Other Formats)
38550 \begin_layout Standard
38551 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
38555 \begin_layout Subsection
38559 \begin_layout Standard
38560 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38567 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38571 , the table toolbar
38572 \begin_inset Index idx
38575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38584 \begin_inset space ~
38589 manual, the math macro toolbar
38590 \begin_inset Index idx
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 \begin_layout Chapter
38607 The Document Settings
38608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38610 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38615 \begin_inset Index idx
38618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38619 Document ! Settings
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38628 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
38629 whole document and is called with the menu
38631 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38635 You can save your document settings as default with the
38637 Save as Document Defaults
38639 button in the dialog.
38640 This will create a template named
38644 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
38648 \begin_layout Standard
38653 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
38654 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
38657 \begin_layout Standard
38658 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
38661 \begin_layout Section
38665 \begin_layout Standard
38666 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
38668 Document classes are described in section
38669 \begin_inset space ~
38673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38675 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
38683 \begin_layout Standard
38687 \begin_inset space ~
38692 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
38696 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class.
38697 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
38699 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
38708 \begin_layout Standard
38709 Some classes use special class options by default.
38710 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
38714 and you can decide to use them or not.
38715 If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
38716 recommended to leave them untouched.
38721 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
38726 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
38727 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
38732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38733 When you want to use one of the following drivers
38734 \begin_inset Newline newline
38739 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
38742 \begin_inset Newline newline
38745 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
38751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38753 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
38765 \begin_layout Standard
38766 Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child
38768 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
38769 document is opened without its master.
38770 This way child documents are always compilable.
38771 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38786 \begin_layout Standard
38787 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
38797 \begin_inset Index idx
38800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38801 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
38807 \begin_inset Index idx
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38811 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
38816 for cross-references, see sec.
38817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38823 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38830 \begin_layout Section
38834 \begin_layout Standard
38835 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
38836 Please refer to the section
38839 \begin_inset space ~
38847 \begin_inset space ~
38852 manual for details.
38855 \begin_layout Section
38859 \begin_layout Standard
38860 Modules are explained in section
38861 \begin_inset space ~
38865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38867 reference "sub:Modules"
38874 \begin_layout Section
38878 \begin_layout Standard
38880 \begin_inset space ~
38884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38886 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
38893 \begin_layout Section
38897 \begin_layout Standard
38898 The document font settings are described in section
38899 \begin_inset space ~
38903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38905 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
38912 \begin_layout Section
38916 \begin_layout Standard
38917 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
38919 The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here.
38922 \begin_layout Standard
38923 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
38924 That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM
38926 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
38929 \begin_layout Section
38933 \begin_layout Standard
38934 A description of this menu is given in section
38935 \begin_inset space ~
38939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38941 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
38946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38948 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
38955 \begin_layout Section
38959 \begin_layout Standard
38960 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38967 reference "sub:Margins"
38974 \begin_layout Section
38976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38978 name "sec:Language-encodings"
38983 \begin_inset Index idx
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 Language ! Encoding
38995 \begin_layout Standard
38996 The document language and quote styles are set here.
38997 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
38998 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
38999 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39000 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39001 known for a particular character).
39005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39006 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39011 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39016 manual for details.
39024 \begin_layout Standard
39025 If you use the option
39029 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39030 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39031 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
39032 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39033 exactly one encoding.
39034 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39037 \begin_layout Standard
39038 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39039 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39040 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
39041 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39042 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
39043 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39048 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
39049 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
39050 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39051 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
39052 engines to standard LaTeX.
39053 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39054 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39107 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
39112 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39116 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39119 \begin_layout Standard
39123 \begin_inset space ~
39128 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39138 The possible settings are:
39141 \begin_layout Description
39142 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39144 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39145 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39149 \begin_inset space ~
39153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39155 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
39162 \begin_layout Description
39163 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
39164 format you will use.
39165 In many cases this will be
39170 \begin_inset Index idx
39173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39174 LaTeX-packages ! babel
39180 If the newer package
39185 \begin_inset Index idx
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39189 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
39194 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
39195 this package will be used instead of
39202 \begin_layout Description
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39215 would be more appropriate.
39218 \begin_layout Description
39219 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
39220 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
39224 (for German texts), type in
39227 \begin_inset Newline newline
39232 usepackage{ngerman}
39235 \begin_layout Description
39236 None will not use a language package.
39237 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
39240 \begin_layout Standard
39241 Here is a list with the important encodings:
39244 \begin_layout Description
39246 \begin_inset space ~
39250 \begin_inset space ~
39254 \begin_inset space ~
39261 , but the LaTeX-package
39266 \begin_inset Index idx
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39270 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39276 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
39277 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
39278 languages in TeX code.
39281 \begin_layout Description
39282 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
39283 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
39284 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
39287 \begin_layout Description
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39293 \begin_inset space ~
39296 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
39299 \begin_layout Description
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39305 \begin_inset space ~
39308 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
39311 \begin_layout Description
39313 \begin_inset space ~
39316 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
39319 \begin_layout Description
39321 \begin_inset space ~
39325 \begin_inset space ~
39328 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
39329 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
39332 \begin_layout Description
39334 \begin_inset space ~
39338 \begin_inset space ~
39341 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
39345 \begin_layout Description
39347 \begin_inset space ~
39351 \begin_inset space ~
39354 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
39355 ISO-8859-13 encoding
39358 \begin_layout Description
39360 \begin_inset space ~
39364 \begin_inset space ~
39368 \begin_inset space ~
39371 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
39372 \begin_inset space ~
39378 \begin_layout Description
39380 \begin_inset space ~
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39388 \begin_inset space ~
39391 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
39392 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
39395 \begin_layout Description
39397 \begin_inset space ~
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39404 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
39405 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
39406 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39407 \begin_inset space ~
39411 \begin_inset space ~
39417 \begin_layout Description
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39423 \begin_inset space ~
39426 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
39427 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
39428 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
39429 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39430 \begin_inset space ~
39434 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_layout Description
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39446 \begin_inset space ~
39449 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
39452 \begin_layout Description
39454 \begin_inset space ~
39458 \begin_inset space ~
39461 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
39464 \begin_layout Description
39466 \begin_inset space ~
39470 \begin_inset space ~
39473 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
39476 \begin_layout Description
39478 \begin_inset space ~
39481 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
39484 \begin_layout Description
39486 \begin_inset space ~
39489 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
39492 \begin_layout Description
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39501 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
39504 \begin_layout Description
39506 \begin_inset space ~
39510 \begin_inset space ~
39516 \begin_layout Description
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39522 \begin_inset space ~
39525 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
39528 \begin_layout Description
39530 \begin_inset space ~
39534 \begin_inset space ~
39540 \begin_layout Description
39542 \begin_inset space ~
39546 \begin_inset space ~
39549 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39554 \begin_inset Index idx
39557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39558 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39563 , when using this, set the document language to
39568 \begin_layout Description
39570 \begin_inset space ~
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39577 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39581 , when using this, set the document language to
39584 \begin_inset space ~
39590 \begin_layout Description
39592 \begin_inset space ~
39596 \begin_inset space ~
39599 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39604 \begin_inset Index idx
39607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
39613 , when using this, set the document language to
39618 \begin_layout Description
39620 \begin_inset space ~
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39627 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39631 , when using this, set the document language to
39636 \begin_layout Description
39638 \begin_inset space ~
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39645 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39649 , when using this, set the document language to
39654 \begin_layout Description
39656 \begin_inset space ~
39659 (EUC-KR) for Korean
39662 \begin_layout Description
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39675 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
39678 \begin_layout Description
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39684 \begin_inset space ~
39688 \begin_inset space ~
39691 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
39692 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
39693 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
39696 \begin_layout Description
39698 \begin_inset space ~
39702 \begin_inset space ~
39708 \begin_layout Description
39710 \begin_inset space ~
39714 \begin_inset space ~
39717 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
39718 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
39721 \begin_layout Description
39723 \begin_inset space ~
39727 \begin_inset space ~
39730 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
39735 \begin_inset Index idx
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39744 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
39747 \begin_layout Description
39749 \begin_inset space ~
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39756 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
39764 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
39769 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
39771 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
39774 \begin_layout Description
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39783 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39788 \begin_inset Index idx
39791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39792 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
39797 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
39800 \begin_layout Description
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39805 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39810 \begin_inset Index idx
39813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39820 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
39824 \begin_layout Description
39826 \begin_inset space ~
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39834 \begin_inset space ~
39837 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
39838 \begin_inset space ~
39844 \begin_layout Description
39846 \begin_inset space ~
39850 \begin_inset space ~
39854 \begin_inset space ~
39857 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
39858 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
39859 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
39863 \begin_layout Description
39865 \begin_inset space ~
39869 \begin_inset space ~
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39876 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
39877 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
39880 \begin_layout Standard
39881 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
39884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39890 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
39894 for more information on the language package.
39897 \begin_layout Section
39899 \begin_inset Index idx
39902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39909 \begin_inset Index idx
39912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39921 \begin_layout Standard
39922 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39927 out notes (default: light grey).
39932 sets the color back to the default.
39935 \begin_layout Standard
39936 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39941 boxes (default: red).
39944 \begin_layout Standard
39945 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39949 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39954 out note appears blue in the output.)
39962 \begin_layout Standard
39963 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
39966 \begin_inset space ~
39971 in the document settings under
39974 \begin_inset space ~
39979 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39990 \begin_inset space ~
39996 For example the option
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40005 \begin_layout Standard
40006 sets the link text color to black.
40007 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
40012 \begin_inset Index idx
40015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40016 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
40022 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40031 \begin_layout Standard
40032 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40038 \begin_layout Standard
40039 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
40040 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
40041 \begin_inset space ~
40044 Code behind a forced page break:
40047 \begin_layout Itemize
40048 For the page color:
40049 \begin_inset Newline newline
40056 pagecolor{color name}
40059 \begin_layout Itemize
40060 For the text color:
40061 \begin_inset Newline newline
40071 \begin_layout Standard
40072 The color name can hereby be one of these:
40105 \begin_inset Newline newline
40108 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
40112 \begin_layout Itemize
40113 For the page background color:
40114 \begin_inset Newline newline
40119 page_backgroundcolor
40122 \begin_layout Itemize
40123 For the main text color:
40124 \begin_inset Newline newline
40132 \begin_layout Itemize
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40137 box background color:
40138 \begin_inset Newline newline
40146 \begin_layout Itemize
40148 \begin_inset space ~
40151 out note text color:
40152 \begin_inset Newline newline
40160 \begin_layout Standard
40161 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40172 \begin_inset space ~
40180 \begin_layout Section
40184 \begin_layout Standard
40185 Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section
40186 depth in the table of contents as described in section
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40193 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
40200 \begin_layout Section
40204 \begin_layout Standard
40205 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
40210 \begin_inset Index idx
40213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40214 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
40224 \begin_inset Index idx
40227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40228 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
40234 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
40239 \begin_inset Index idx
40242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40243 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
40248 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
40250 For a further description see section
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40257 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40264 \begin_layout Section
40268 \begin_layout Standard
40269 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
40270 and you can define additional indexes.
40271 Please refer to section
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40278 reference "sec:Index"
40285 \begin_layout Section
40289 \begin_layout Standard
40290 The PDF properties are explained in section
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40297 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40304 \begin_layout Section
40308 \begin_layout Standard
40309 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
40314 \begin_inset Index idx
40317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40318 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
40328 \begin_inset Index idx
40331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40332 LaTeX-packages ! esint
40342 \begin_inset Index idx
40345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40346 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
40356 \begin_inset Index idx
40359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40360 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
40365 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
40368 \begin_layout Description
40369 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
40370 ensure that you have enabled
40373 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_layout Description
40382 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40397 \begin_layout Description
40398 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
40409 \begin_layout Description
40410 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
40412 Chemical Symbols and Equations
40421 \begin_layout Section
40425 \begin_layout Standard
40426 The float placement options are described in section
40429 \begin_inset space ~
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40445 \begin_layout Section
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40450 The listings settings are explained in chapter
40452 Program Code Listings
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_layout Section
40469 \begin_layout Standard
40470 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
40471 The itemize environment is described in section
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40478 reference "sec:Itemize"
40485 \begin_layout Section
40489 \begin_layout Standard
40490 Branches are described in section
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40497 reference "sec:Branches"
40504 \begin_layout Section
40506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40508 name "sec:Doc-Output"
40515 \begin_layout Standard
40516 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
40519 \begin_layout Description
40521 \begin_inset space ~
40525 \begin_inset space ~
40528 Format: The format that is used when you hit
40529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40548 View Master Document
40549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40556 Update Master Document
40557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40564 menu or the toolbar.
40565 The default is set in
40567 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40568 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40578 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40585 \begin_layout Description
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40594 Output settings for the menu
40596 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40598 \begin_inset space ~
40604 For a detailed description see section
40606 Reverse DVI/PDF search
40611 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_layout Description
40621 \begin_inset space ~
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40628 Options settings for the export format
40636 \begin_inset space ~
40641 will assure that the output follows exactly version
40642 \begin_inset space ~
40645 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40654 settings are described in detail in section
40656 Math Output in XHTML
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40667 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
40670 \begin_layout Section
40675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40686 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
40687 or to define LaTeX-commands.
40688 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
40689 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
40693 \begin_layout Standard
40694 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
40695 \begin_inset space ~
40699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40701 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
40708 \begin_layout Chapter
40714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40716 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40721 \begin_inset Index idx
40724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40733 \begin_layout Standard
40734 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
40736 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40740 It has the following submenus.
40743 \begin_layout Section
40747 \begin_layout Subsection
40751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40752 User Interface File
40753 \begin_inset Index idx
40756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40757 Customization ! of toolbars
40763 \begin_inset Index idx
40766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40767 Customization ! of menus
40775 \begin_layout Standard
40776 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
40777 interface (ui) file.
40778 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
40779 The toolbar buttons and menu entries are specified in the files
40788 Both files are loaded by the
40793 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these
40794 files and edit the entries.
40797 \begin_layout Standard
40798 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: The
40810 entries must be finished with an explicit
40835 and in the case of the
40836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40848 The syntax for the entries is:
40851 \begin_layout Standard
40852 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40880 \begin_layout Standard
40882 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40885 All LyX-functions are listed in the menu
40887 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40897 \begin_layout Standard
40898 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
40904 \begin_layout Standard
40905 An example: Assuming you use the menu
40907 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40910 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
40914 \begin_layout Standard
40915 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40939 \begin_layout Standard
40941 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40952 menu in the .inc-file to have the sixth bookmark.
40955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40959 \begin_layout Standard
40960 Here you can change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
40961 The currently available icon sets are compared in
40962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40965 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
40972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40976 \begin_layout Standard
40979 Enable tool tips in main work area
40981 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
40985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40989 \begin_layout Standard
40992 Restore window layouts and geometries
40994 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
40995 in the last LyX session.
40998 \begin_layout Standard
41001 Restore cursor positions
41003 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
41007 \begin_layout Standard
41010 Load opened files from last session
41012 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
41015 \begin_layout Standard
41018 Clear all session information
41020 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
41021 of last opened documents, etc.).
41024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41028 name "sub:Backup documents"
41033 \begin_inset Index idx
41036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41045 \begin_layout Standard
41048 Backup original documents when saving
41050 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
41051 it was saved the last time.
41052 It is stored in the same folder as your document or in the
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41063 reference "sec:Paths"
41068 The backup file has the file extension
41069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41083 \begin_layout Standard
41086 Backup documents, every
41088 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
41091 \begin_layout Standard
41094 Save documents compressed by default
41096 saves the files always in a compressed format.
41099 \begin_layout Standard
41104 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
41107 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41117 \begin_layout Standard
41120 Open documents in tabs
41122 is not used, then every file will be opened in its own new instance of
41126 \begin_layout Standard
41131 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
41135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41143 reference "sec:Paths"
41147 for information about LyXServer pipes.
41153 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
41155 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
41158 \begin_layout Standard
41161 Single close-tab button
41163 there will only be one button (
41166 \begin_inset Graphics
41167 filename ../images/closetab.png
41174 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
41175 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
41178 \begin_layout Standard
41179 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
41195 \begin_layout Subsection
41197 \begin_inset Index idx
41200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41209 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
41216 \begin_layout Standard
41217 These fonts are used to display your documents on the screen.
41220 \begin_layout Standard
41221 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41229 This section only deals with the fonts
41234 The fonts that appear on the output are independent from these fonts, and
41237 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41238 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41249 \begin_layout Standard
41250 By default, LyX uses
41254 as roman (serif) font,
41262 (depends on the system) as
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41281 \begin_layout Standard
41282 You can change the font size with the
41289 \begin_layout Standard
41294 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
41296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41299 points have the size of 1
41300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41310 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
41315 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
41316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41320 The sizes are explained in detail in section
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41327 reference "sub:Document-Font"
41334 \begin_layout Standard
41337 Use Pixmap Cache to speed up font rendering
41339 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
41340 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
41341 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
41342 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
41344 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_layout Subsection
41353 \begin_inset Index idx
41356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41363 \begin_inset Index idx
41366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41375 \begin_layout Standard
41376 Here you can change all the colors used by LyX.
41377 Choose an item in the list and use the
41384 \begin_layout Standard
41385 By using the option
41389 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
41392 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41402 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
41405 \begin_layout Subsection
41407 \begin_inset Index idx
41410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41419 \begin_layout Standard
41420 Here you can specify if graphics inside LyX are displayed.
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41428 enables previewing snippets of your document.
41429 This feature is described in section
41430 \begin_inset space ~
41434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41436 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41443 \begin_layout Standard
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41460 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
41463 \begin_layout Section
41465 \begin_inset Index idx
41468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41477 \begin_layout Subsection
41481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41485 \begin_layout Standard
41488 Cursor follows scrollbar
41490 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
41494 \begin_layout Standard
41495 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
41496 If you set the value to zero the thickness of the cursor scales relative
41497 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
41500 \begin_layout Standard
41503 Scroll below end of document
41505 is self-explanatory.
41508 \begin_layout Standard
41509 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
41516 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
41518 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
41519 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
41522 \begin_layout Standard
41525 Sort environments alphabetically
41527 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41530 \begin_layout Standard
41533 Group environments by their category
41535 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41538 \begin_layout Standard
41539 The math macro editing option determines the editing style, see the section
41551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41555 \begin_layout Standard
41556 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
41561 specifies the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
41562 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
41566 \begin_layout Subsection
41568 \begin_inset Index idx
41571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41578 \begin_inset Index idx
41581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41582 Settings ! Shortcuts
41590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41594 \begin_layout Standard
41595 Bindings are used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
41596 Several binding files are available:
41599 \begin_layout Description
41600 cua.bind typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
41603 \begin_layout Description
41604 (x)emacs.bind set of bindings like they are used in the editor programs
41615 \begin_layout Description
41616 mac.bind set of bindings for
41619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41627 \begin_layout Standard
41628 There are also bind-files designed for special document classes, like
41632 , and bind files for special languages.
41633 The names of language bind-files begin with a language code, e.
41634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41638 \begin_inset space \space{}
41642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41650 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
41654 \begin_layout Standard
41655 Some bind-files, like
41659 , have only a small scope.
41660 When looking at the end of the file
41664 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
41667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41671 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
41676 \begin_inset Index idx
41679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41680 Key Bindings ! Editing
41688 \begin_layout Standard
41689 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
41690 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
41691 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
41694 Show key-bindings containing
41697 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
41698 Insert there for example as keyword
41699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41706 and you get the 4 different existing shortcuts for the 3 different functions
41708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41716 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
41717 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
41721 that you will find in the
41728 \begin_layout Standard
41730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41734 \begin_inset space \space{}
41745 , select the function and press the
41750 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
41751 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
41752 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
41753 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by modifying an existing
41754 binding and adding the different function names as a semicolon separated
41756 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
41758 The binding for the function
41762 is an example of this.
41765 \begin_layout Standard
41766 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying bind-files with a
41768 The syntax of the entries is:
41771 \begin_layout Standard
41777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41795 \begin_layout Subsection
41797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41799 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
41804 \begin_inset Index idx
41807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41814 \begin_inset Index idx
41817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41818 Settings ! Keyboard Map
41826 \begin_layout Standard
41827 Normally keyboard settings have to be done in a menu of your operating system.
41828 For the case that this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
41830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41834 \begin_inset space \space{}
41837 a Czech keyboard but want to write with it like with a Romanian one, you
41838 can use the keyboard map file named
41845 \begin_layout Standard
41846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 Keyboard maps are only provided as makeshift and don't work on all systems.
41862 \begin_layout Standard
41863 You can furthermore specify here the
41865 Wheel scrolling speed
41868 The standard value is 1.0, higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
41872 \begin_layout Standard
41877 you can select a key for zooming.
41878 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
41881 \begin_layout Subsection
41885 \begin_layout Standard
41886 Input completion is described in sec.
41887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41893 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
41900 \begin_layout Section
41902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41909 \begin_inset Index idx
41912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 \begin_inset Index idx
41922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41931 \begin_layout Description
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41936 directory This is LyX's working directory.
41937 It is the default when you
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41956 \begin_layout Description
41958 \begin_inset space ~
41961 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
41963 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41977 \begin_layout Description
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41982 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
41988 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41992 \begin_inset Newline newline
41996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42008 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
42016 \begin_layout Description
42018 \begin_inset space ~
42022 \begin_inset Index idx
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42031 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
42032 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
42033 \begin_inset space ~
42037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42039 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42047 will be used to save the backups.
42048 \begin_inset Newline newline
42051 Backup files have the ending
42052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42062 \begin_layout Description
42067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 \begin_inset space ~
42078 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
42079 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
42080 \begin_inset Newline newline
42087 You add a BibTeX-database
42092 You can edit this file with the program
42101 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
42104 \begin_inset space ~
42110 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
42115 and click on the LyX-symbol.
42116 The entry will now be inserted as citation at the current cursor position
42122 and LyX need of course to be run the same time.
42123 \begin_inset Newline newline
42126 The pipe is also used for the
42131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42137 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42142 \begin_inset Newline newline
42145 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
42146 \begin_inset Newline newline
42162 \begin_layout Description
42164 \begin_inset space ~
42167 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
42170 \begin_layout Description
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42175 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
42176 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does otherwise not work or
42177 if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
42180 \begin_layout Description
42182 \begin_inset space ~
42185 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
42191 You only need to specify it if you are using
42195 and spell checking does otherwise not work or if you want to use custom/alterna
42201 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
42205 \begin_layout Description
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42210 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
42211 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list where
42212 to find it on the system.
42213 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
42214 is configured, so that you normally don't have to modify it.
42216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42223 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
42224 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
42227 \begin_layout Description
42229 \begin_inset space ~
42232 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows to use external files which
42233 are included to a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the document
42235 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
42237 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
42238 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
42239 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
42240 scanned for the input files.
42241 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
42242 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
42243 It is recommended to include always '.' as one of the paths, otherwise compilati
42244 on may fail for some documents.
42247 \begin_layout Section
42251 \begin_layout Standard
42252 Here you can insert your name and email address.
42253 The identity will be used when you have enabled change tracking as described
42255 \begin_inset space ~
42259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42261 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42265 , to mark changes you make as yours.
42268 \begin_layout Section
42270 \begin_inset Index idx
42273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 Language ! Settings
42280 \begin_inset Index idx
42283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42284 Settings ! Language
42292 \begin_layout Subsection
42294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42296 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
42303 \begin_layout Description
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42309 \begin_inset space ~
42312 language Here you can select the language of LyX's menus.
42313 You find the actual translation status here:
42314 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42316 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
42323 \begin_layout Description
42325 \begin_inset space ~
42328 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
42330 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
42331 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
42332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42348 The most widespread language package is
42353 \begin_inset Index idx
42356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42357 LaTeX-packages ! babel
42362 , it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
42363 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
42364 alternative language package
42369 \begin_inset Index idx
42372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
42378 that is more suited for the multi-script support of these engines.
42379 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
42381 The available selections are described in sec.
42382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42388 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42395 \begin_layout Description
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42400 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
42401 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
42402 An example is the start command
42408 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
42413 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42428 selectlanguage{$$lang}
42433 \begin_layout Description
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42443 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
42444 command toggles the package on and off.
42447 \begin_layout Description
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42453 \begin_inset space ~
42456 Point Define the default decimal point for the use in tables (decimal point
42460 \begin_layout Description
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_inset space ~
42469 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
42470 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
42471 used by all LaTeX-packages.
42472 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
42479 \begin_layout Description
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42484 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
42486 When this option is not set, the
42489 \begin_inset space ~
42494 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
42495 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
42498 \begin_inset space ~
42506 \begin_layout Description
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42520 When it is not set, the
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42528 is set to the end of the document.
42531 \begin_layout Description
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_inset space ~
42540 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
42541 language will be underlined in blue.
42544 \begin_layout Description
42546 \begin_inset space ~
42550 \begin_inset space ~
42553 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
42554 like Arabic, Hebrew, Farsi.
42557 \begin_layout Description
42559 \begin_inset space ~
42562 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
42563 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
42564 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
42565 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
42568 \begin_layout Subsection
42572 \begin_layout Standard
42573 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
42574 \begin_inset space ~
42578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42580 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42587 \begin_layout Section
42591 \begin_layout Subsection
42595 \begin_layout Description
42597 \begin_inset space ~
42601 \begin_inset space ~
42604 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
42607 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42608 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42610 \begin_inset space ~
42616 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
42619 \begin_layout Description
42621 \begin_inset space ~
42625 \begin_inset Index idx
42628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 \begin_inset Index idx
42638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42639 Settings ! Date format
42644 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
42645 \begin_inset Newline newline
42649 \begin_inset Flex URL
42652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42654 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
42660 \begin_inset Newline newline
42663 For example the format
42664 \begin_inset Newline newline
42668 \begin_inset Newline newline
42671 prints the date as day/month/year.
42674 \begin_layout Description
42676 \begin_inset space ~
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42683 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
42686 \begin_layout Description
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42691 search Commands that will be used for the menu
42693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42701 For a detailed description see section
42703 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42708 \begin_inset space ~
42716 \begin_layout Subsection
42718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42725 \begin_inset Index idx
42728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 \begin_inset Index idx
42738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42747 \begin_layout Description
42749 \begin_inset space ~
42752 printer Here you can specify the name of your default printer.
42753 The name will be used when the
42758 \begin_inset Newline newline
42762 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42770 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
42778 \begin_layout Description
42780 \begin_inset space ~
42783 command is the command LyX
42784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42791 LaTeX uses for printing.
42799 \begin_layout Description
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42805 \begin_inset space ~
42808 Options Here you can specify printer options.
42809 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
42810 of the program that provides the
42817 \begin_layout Description
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_inset space ~
42830 printer This option works only for the
42835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42847 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
42848 This is an option only for dvips experts.
42851 \begin_layout Subsection
42856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42866 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
42871 \begin_inset Index idx
42874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42883 \begin_layout Description
42885 \begin_inset space ~
42892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42904 \begin_inset space ~
42907 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
42912 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
42933 are used for Cyrillic.
42934 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
42935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42947 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
42948 LyX sets up in the background.
42949 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
42952 \begin_layout Description
42954 \begin_inset space ~
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42961 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
42966 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
42969 \begin_layout Description
42971 \begin_inset space ~
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42979 \begin_inset space ~
42983 \begin_inset space ~
42986 options They only have an effect when the program
42990 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
42993 \begin_layout Standard
42994 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
42995 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
42996 manuals of the applications.
42999 \begin_layout Description
43001 \begin_inset space ~
43004 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43011 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
43018 \begin_layout Description
43020 \begin_inset space ~
43023 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
43024 \begin_inset space ~
43028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43030 reference "sub:Index-Program"
43037 \begin_layout Description
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43042 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
43043 \begin_inset space ~
43047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43049 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
43056 \begin_layout Description
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43069 \begin_inset space ~
43072 command Command for the program
43076 that is described in the section
43082 Additional Features
43087 \begin_layout Standard
43088 There are additionally the following options:
43091 \begin_layout Description
43093 \begin_inset space ~
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43105 \begin_inset space ~
43109 \begin_inset space ~
43112 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
43113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43130 to separate folders.
43131 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
43132 \begin_inset Index idx
43135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43142 \begin_inset Index idx
43145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43154 \begin_layout Description
43156 \begin_inset space ~
43160 \begin_inset space ~
43164 \begin_inset space ~
43168 \begin_inset space ~
43172 \begin_inset space ~
43176 \begin_inset space ~
43179 changes Removes all manually set document class options in the
43181 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43184 dialog when changing the document class.
43187 \begin_layout Section
43189 \begin_inset space ~
43193 \begin_inset Index idx
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43205 \begin_layout Subsection
43207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43209 name "sub:Converters"
43214 \begin_inset Index idx
43217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 \begin_layout Standard
43227 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
43228 from one format to another.
43229 You can modify converters or create new ones.
43230 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the field
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43247 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43256 drop-down list, modify the
43260 field and press the
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43270 Converter File Cache
43272 is enabled, conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
43275 Maximum Age (in days
43278 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
43279 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
43282 \begin_layout Standard
43283 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
43284 definition, is described in the section
43295 \begin_layout Subsection
43297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43299 name "sec:File-Formats"
43304 \begin_inset Index idx
43307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43314 \begin_inset Index idx
43317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43326 \begin_layout Standard
43327 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
43328 You can modify the viewer and editor program that should be used for certain
43332 \begin_layout Standard
43333 Furthermore, you can define the
43335 Default output format
43337 that is used when you use
43339 View, Update, View Master Document
43343 Update Master Document
43349 menu or the toolbar.
43352 \begin_layout Standard
43353 More about formats and their options is described in the section
43364 \begin_layout Standard
43365 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
43366 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
43367 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
43368 This is done by specifying a
43373 More about this is described in the section
43384 \begin_layout Chapter
43385 Units available in LyX
43386 \begin_inset Index idx
43389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43398 name "chap:Units-available-in"
43405 \begin_layout Standard
43406 To understand the units described in this documentation,
43407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43409 reference "tab:Units"
43413 explains all units available in LyX.
43416 \begin_layout Standard
43417 \begin_inset Float table
43423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43424 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43442 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43450 \begin_inset Tabular
43451 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
43452 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
43453 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43454 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43605 scaled point (65536
43606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43666 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
43670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43721 % of original image width
43728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43935 \begin_layout Chapter
43937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43939 name "chap:Credits"
43946 \begin_layout Standard
43947 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
43948 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
43951 \begin_layout Itemize
43954 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
43957 \begin_layout Itemize
43963 \begin_layout Itemize
43969 \begin_layout Itemize
43975 \begin_layout Itemize
43981 \begin_layout Itemize
43987 \begin_layout Itemize
43993 \begin_layout Itemize
43999 \begin_layout Itemize
44002 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
44005 \begin_layout Itemize
44011 \begin_layout Itemize
44017 \begin_layout Itemize
44023 \begin_layout Itemize
44029 \begin_layout Itemize
44035 \begin_layout Itemize
44041 \begin_layout Itemize
44047 \begin_layout Itemize
44053 \begin_layout Itemize
44055 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44064 \begin_layout Standard
44065 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
44068 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
44075 \begin_layout Bibliography
44076 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44077 LatexCommand bibitem
44084 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44087 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
44092 \begin_inset Newline newline
44096 \begin_inset Flex URL
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
44109 \begin_layout Bibliography
44110 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44111 LatexCommand bibitem
44112 key "latexcompanion"
44116 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
44118 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
44121 Addison-Wesley, 2004
44124 \begin_layout Bibliography
44125 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44126 LatexCommand bibitem
44131 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
44134 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
44137 Addison-Wesley, 2003
44140 \begin_layout Bibliography
44141 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44142 LatexCommand bibitem
44149 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
44152 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
44155 \begin_layout Bibliography
44156 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44157 LatexCommand bibitem
44169 Addison-Wesley, 1984
44172 \begin_layout Bibliography
44173 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44174 LatexCommand bibitem
44180 \begin_inset Newline newline
44184 \begin_inset Flex URL
44187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44189 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
44197 \begin_layout Bibliography
44198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44199 LatexCommand bibitem
44205 \begin_inset Newline newline
44209 \begin_inset Flex URL
44212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
44222 \begin_layout Bibliography
44223 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44224 LatexCommand bibitem
44230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44232 name "Documentation"
44233 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
44242 \begin_inset Newline newline
44246 \begin_inset Flex URL
44249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44251 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
44259 \begin_layout Bibliography
44260 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44261 LatexCommand bibitem
44267 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44269 name "Documentation"
44270 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
44274 how to use the program
44279 \begin_inset Newline newline
44283 \begin_inset Flex URL
44286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44288 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
44296 \begin_layout Bibliography
44297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44298 LatexCommand bibitem
44304 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44306 name "Documentation"
44307 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
44316 \begin_inset Newline newline
44320 \begin_inset Flex URL
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44325 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
44333 \begin_layout Bibliography
44334 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44335 LatexCommand bibitem
44341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44343 name "Documentation"
44344 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
44353 \begin_inset Newline newline
44357 \begin_inset Flex URL
44360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44362 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
44370 \begin_layout Bibliography
44371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44372 LatexCommand bibitem
44378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44380 name "Documentation"
44381 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf"
44385 of the LaTeX-package
44390 \begin_inset Index idx
44393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44394 LaTeX-packages ! caption
44400 \begin_inset Newline newline
44404 \begin_inset Flex URL
44407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf
44417 \begin_layout Bibliography
44418 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44419 LatexCommand bibitem
44425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44427 name "Documentation"
44428 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
44432 of the LaTeX-package
44437 \begin_inset Index idx
44440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
44447 \begin_inset Newline newline
44451 \begin_inset Flex URL
44454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44456 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
44464 \begin_layout Bibliography
44465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44466 LatexCommand bibitem
44472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44474 name "Documentation"
44475 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
44479 of the LaTeX-package
44484 \begin_inset Index idx
44487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44488 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
44494 \begin_inset Newline newline
44498 \begin_inset Flex URL
44501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44503 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
44511 \begin_layout Bibliography
44512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44513 LatexCommand bibitem
44519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44521 name "Documentation"
44522 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf"
44526 of the LaTeX-package
44531 \begin_inset Index idx
44534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44535 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
44541 \begin_inset Newline newline
44545 \begin_inset Flex URL
44548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf
44558 \begin_layout Bibliography
44559 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44560 LatexCommand bibitem
44566 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44568 name "Documentation"
44569 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
44573 of the LaTeX-package
44578 \begin_inset Index idx
44581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
44588 \begin_inset Newline newline
44592 \begin_inset Flex URL
44595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
44605 \begin_layout Bibliography
44606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44607 LatexCommand bibitem
44613 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44615 name "Documentation"
44616 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
44620 of the LaTeX-package
44625 \begin_inset Index idx
44628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44629 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
44635 \begin_inset Newline newline
44639 \begin_inset Flex URL
44642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44644 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
44652 \begin_layout Bibliography
44653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44654 LatexCommand bibitem
44660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44662 name "Documentation"
44663 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
44667 of the LaTeX-package
44672 \begin_inset Index idx
44675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44676 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
44682 \begin_inset Newline newline
44686 \begin_inset Flex URL
44689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
44699 \begin_layout Bibliography
44700 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44701 LatexCommand bibitem
44707 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44709 name "Documentation"
44710 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
44714 of the LaTeX-package
44719 \begin_inset Index idx
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44723 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
44729 \begin_inset Newline newline
44733 \begin_inset Flex URL
44736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44738 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
44746 \begin_layout Bibliography
44747 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44748 LatexCommand bibitem
44754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44757 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
44761 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
44762 \begin_inset Newline newline
44766 \begin_inset Flex URL
44769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44771 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
44779 \begin_layout Bibliography
44780 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44781 LatexCommand bibitem
44787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44790 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
44794 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
44795 \begin_inset Newline newline
44799 \begin_inset Flex URL
44802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
44812 \begin_layout Bibliography
44813 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44814 LatexCommand bibitem
44820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44823 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
44827 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
44828 \begin_inset Newline newline
44832 \begin_inset Flex URL
44835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44837 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
44845 \begin_layout Bibliography
44846 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44847 LatexCommand bibitem
44853 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44856 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
44860 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
44861 \begin_inset Newline newline
44865 \begin_inset Flex URL
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44870 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
44878 \begin_layout Bibliography
44879 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44880 LatexCommand bibitem
44886 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44889 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
44893 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
44894 \begin_inset Newline newline
44898 \begin_inset Flex URL
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44903 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
44911 \begin_layout Bibliography
44912 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44913 LatexCommand bibitem
44919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44922 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
44926 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
44927 \begin_inset Newline newline
44931 \begin_inset Flex URL
44934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
44944 \begin_layout Bibliography
44945 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44946 LatexCommand bibitem
44952 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44955 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
44959 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
44960 \begin_inset Newline newline
44964 \begin_inset Flex URL
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44969 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
44977 \begin_layout Bibliography
44978 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44979 LatexCommand bibitem
44985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44988 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
44992 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
44993 \begin_inset Newline newline
44997 \begin_inset Flex URL
45000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45002 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
45010 \begin_layout Bibliography
45011 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45012 LatexCommand bibitem
45018 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45021 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
45025 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
45026 \begin_inset Newline newline
45030 \begin_inset Flex URL
45033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45035 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
45043 \begin_layout Bibliography
45044 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45045 LatexCommand bibitem
45051 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45054 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
45058 about new features in
45063 \begin_inset Newline newline
45067 \begin_inset Flex URL
45070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45072 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
45080 \begin_layout Standard
45081 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45115 \begin_inset Note Note
45118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45125 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
45126 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
45127 bibliography is the second one:
45135 \begin_layout Standard
45136 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
45137 LatexCommand bibtex
45138 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
45139 options "biblio/alphadin"
45146 \begin_layout Standard
45147 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
45150 \begin_layout Standard
45151 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
45152 LatexCommand printnomenclature
45158 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
45159 LatexCommand printindex